JP2019171162A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which enables a player to understand a game easily.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: input means which can input game information for selecting a notification mode for prompting a player to make a game ball enter one of a first area and a second area; notification mode selection means which selects the notification mode on the basis of the game information, when an imparting condition of a privilege game is established by privilege game establishment means; and notification means which performs notification on the basis of the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection means. First privilege game selection means or second privilege game selection means is set so that the ratios of selecting the privilege game advantageous to a player are different between a case which becomes a specific lottery result on the basis of entering of a game ball into a first ball entering hole and a case which becomes a specific lottery result on the basis of entering of a game ball into a second ball entering hole.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, after a predetermined display mode appears, a big hit based on a predetermined area through which the game ball has passed is allowed to pass through a predetermined area provided on the game board. There is known a gaming machine in which a lottery of types of games is made, and a jackpot game is started with the type of jackpot game selected.

  The lottery ratio of the type of jackpot game is different for each of a plurality of predetermined areas, and the player selects any one of the plurality of predetermined areas and allows the game ball to pass through. The lottery game type is selected by lot.

JP2013-233181A

  However, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to think about which area of the plurality of predetermined areas the game ball is allowed to pass every time a big hit game is generated.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which a game is easy to understand.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first entrance into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance. A lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the mouth or the second entrance, and the first by the lottery means It is possible to simultaneously display the first identification information indicating the lottery result based on entering the entrance and the second identification information indicating the lottery result based on entering the second entrance Display means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, respectively, and the first display information and the second identification information by the dynamic display means. Identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means as either of the identification information The bonus game establishment means for establishing the bonus game granting condition, a first area through which the game ball can pass, a second area different from the first area, and the bonus game establishment means. Based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first area when a game granting condition is established, the bonus game is selected by a bonus game selection means that selects a type of the bonus game and the bonus game establishment means. When the grant condition is established, the second privilege game selecting means for selecting the type of the privilege game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second area, and the first privilege game selecting means or the first (2) A bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game selected by the bonus game selection means, and a notification for urging the player to enter a game ball in one of the first area and the second area. Select mode Input means capable of inputting game information for the purpose, and notification mode selection means for selecting the notification mode based on the game information when the bonus game granting condition is established by the bonus game establishment unit; Notification means for performing notification based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection means, wherein the first privilege game selection means or the second privilege game means is provided to the first entrance. In a case where the specific lottery result is based on the entry, and a case where the specific lottery result is obtained based on the entry to the second entrance, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is provided. The ratio to be selected is set to be different.

  A gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a partition for dividing a gaming area in which a gaming ball can flow into a first gaming area and a second gaming area different from the first gaming area. The first entrance is disposed in the first game area, and the second entrance is disposed in the second entrance.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first entrance where the game ball can enter and the second entrance different from the first entrance, the first entrance or the second entrance. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance, a lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a special game advantageous to the player, and entering the first entrance by the lottery means. Display means capable of simultaneously displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result based on the ball and the second identification information indicating the lottery result based on the ball entering the second entrance, Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and either the first identification information or the second identification information by the dynamic display means On the other hand, when identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, The privilege game granting means is established by the privilege game establishment means for establishing the provision condition of the classic game, the first region through which the game ball can pass and the second region different from the first region, and the privilege game establishment means. In this case, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first area, the bonus game granting condition is established by the bonus game selecting means for selecting the bonus game type and the bonus game establishment means. In this case, the second bonus game selecting means for selecting the type of the bonus game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second area, and the first bonus game selecting means or the second bonus game selecting means. A privilege game granting means for granting the selected privilege game, and a notification mode for urging the player to enter a game ball in one of the first area and the second area. Game information By the input means that can be input, the notification mode selection means for selecting the notification mode based on the game information when the bonus game granting condition is satisfied by the bonus game establishment unit, and the notification mode selection unit A notification means for performing notification based on the selected notification mode, wherein the first privilege game selection means or the second privilege game means is based on the entrance to the first entrance. The ratio of selecting a special game advantageous to the player is different between the case where the result is a specific lottery result and the case where the result is the specific lottery result based on the entry to the second entrance. Is set to.

  Thereby, the area | region where a player enters a game ball can be recognized easily. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, it has a partition member that divides a game area in which a game ball can flow into a first game area and a second game area that is different from the first game area, and the first entrance has the first game area. In the region, the second entrance is disposed at each of the second entrances.

  Thereby, it is possible to play a game by entering any of the first entrance and the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game more suited to the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view inside a distribution unit. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a game information input screen when the cursor position is the game end time, and (b) is a game information input when the cursor position is set. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a screen. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed at the time of jackpot occurrence, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed at the time of the start of the navigation effect performed after a jackpot occurrence. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed in a navigation effect when it is the timing when a game ball passes a 1st gate in a distribution unit, (b) is a game ball in a distribution unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed in a navigation effect when it is a timing which passes 2nd gate. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect that is executed when the game end time arrives during execution of a navigation game, and (b) shows an example of an effect that is executed when the navigation game ends. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed when the information of a navigation game is backed up at the time of a power failure recovery, (b) is a schematic arrangement of the frame switch and the selection switch It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main controller. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot determination value. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table, and (d) is a judgment value per second random number counter C4 and a normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of these. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type based on the 1st gate. (B) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type based on the 2nd gate. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the determination value for the normal symbol, and (b) is a variation type counter CS1 and a variation type at the time of big hit (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of detachment (normal), (d) These are the schematic diagrams which showed typically the corresponding | compatible relationship between the fluctuation | variation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation | variation classification at the time of deviation (probability change). (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the navigation selection table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the game information storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the game information aggregation area, and (c) is an input It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the area | region typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the sensor detection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot classification determination process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the gate control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the data reading process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the navigation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the start difference ball calculation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the 1R difference ball calculation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the winning ball discrimination processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the out sphere discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the navigation game processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the navigation game setting process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the switch discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the upper switch process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the lower switch process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the right switch process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the left switch process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the navigation game end process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the extension confirmation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the navigation game continuation confirmation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the data storage process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the game information related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . (A) is the flowchart which showed the game information input start command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) showed the input screen update command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart. (A) is the flowchart which showed the game information input completion command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the game information input error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the shown flowchart. (A) is the flowchart which showed the game information input stop command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) shows the game extension confirmation command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart. (A) is the flowchart which showed the game continuation confirmation start command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the game continuation confirmation completion command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the shown flowchart. (A) is the flowchart which showed the game result display command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the jackpot command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a navigation type command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus, and (b) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the selection table for 1st gates in 2nd Embodiment, (b) shows typically the content of the selection table for 1st gates in the special figure 1. FIG. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 first gate selection table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the selection table for 2nd gates in 2nd Embodiment, (b) shows typically the content of the selection table for 2nd gates of special drawing 1 in FIG. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 second gate selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the navigation selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 big hit judgment processing which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the navigation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the distribution unit 650. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63 and 64, a distribution unit 650 having a first gate 650a and a second gate 650b, and the like can be attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Installed. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 and selection switches 270 (a) to (d) are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 and the selection switches 270 (a) to 270 (d), for example, input game information or produce effects on a game information input screen displayed on a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later. This is operated by the player when changing the stage of the game or changing the contents of the super reach.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. Various effects such as fluctuating effects and reach effects that accompany the entry to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (start winning prize), which will be described later, are themes given to each stage. Designed to be done together. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “street stage” → “ It is repeatedly changed in the order of “empty stage” → “island stage” → “city stage” →. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box” or “dollar box”) that receives the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. Is called. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64 a, the second entrance 64 b, the regular award 67, the distribution unit 650, the variable award device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion is on the back side of the inner frame 12. It is attached. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64a, the second winning port 64b, the normal winning port 67, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a, a special symbol 1 (one of the first symbols) is drawn, and the ball enters the second entrance 64b. In this case, a special symbol 2 (one of the first symbols) is drawn. A special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and when a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Thereafter, when the ball passes through the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b, the jackpot type is determined. Further, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, a position where the sphere passes through the first gate 650a and the sphere pass through the second gate 650b every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Switch to the position where you want to start. When the special symbol jackpot type is selected, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and at the same time, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses, or the ball Is released) and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times. As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. Although details will be described later, it is determined by a dedicated lottery when the ball passes through the first gate 650a and when the ball passes through the second gate 650b. When the ball passes through the first gate 650a, one of the big hit types is determined from the two types of “big hit A1” and “big hit A2”. When the ball passes through the second gate 650b, one of the big hit types is determined from the four types of “big hit B1,” “big hit B2,” “big hit C1,” and “big hit C2” (FIG. 15 (a ) To (b)). The specific winning opening 65a is opened as many times as the number of jackpot types. Further, after the end of the special gaming state, game value (game value) according to the jackpot type is given to the player as added value after the jackpot ends.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 64b. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 64b, and as a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  When the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, two types of jackpot types selected when the first gate 650a is passed are set as “jackpot A1” and “jackpot A2” (FIG. 15). (See (a)). Further, four types of jackpot types selected when passing through the second gate 650b are set as "big jackpot B1," "big jackpot C1," "big jackpot B2," and "big jackpot C2" (FIG. 15 ( b)). When one of the jackpot types is determined as “big jackpot A1,” “big jackpot A2,” “big jackpot B1,” “big jackpot B2,” “big jackpot C1,” or “big jackpot C2”, the number of rounds corresponding to each jackpot type Special game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, after the special symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed, the game ball passes through either the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b and the jackpot type is determined until the jackpot type is determined. The start is not executed.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started until the game ball passes through either the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed. If a game ball does not pass through the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b after a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), a big hit with a predetermined jackpot type or a jackpot type determined by lottery You may comprise so that a game may be started. Further, the right to execute the jackpot game may be extinguished.

  As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15B, specifically, the “big hit A1” is a big hit (10R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened 10 times, and the big hit game Later, a probability variation gaming state (high probability gaming state) in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability is awarded until the next jackpot. “Big jackpot A2” is a big jackpot (10R jackpot) where the specific winning opening (big open mouth) 65a is opened 10 times, and a short-time gaming state after the jackpot game (special symbol is low probability, normal symbol probability is high probability) Is set to 100 times as a period until the special symbol starts to fluctuate 100 times). “Big jackpot B1” is a big jackpot (4R jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened four times, and after the jackpot game, the probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability ( High probability game state) is awarded until the next jackpot. “Big jackpot B2” is a big jackpot (4R jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened four times, and a short-time gaming state after the jackpot game (special symbol is low probability, normal symbol probability is high probability) Is set to 100 times as a period until the special symbol starts to fluctuate 100 times as a period in which the opening time of the electric accessory becomes long and the number of times of opening is set to be large. “Big jackpot C1” is a big jackpot (16R jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened 16 times, and after the jackpot game, the probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability ( High probability game state) is awarded until the next jackpot. “Big jackpot C2” is a big jackpot (16R jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened 16 times, and a short-time gaming state after the jackpot game (special symbol is low probability, normal symbol probability is high probability) Is set to 100 times as a period until the special symbol starts to fluctuate 100 times). In addition, during “probable bonus game A1”, “big jackpot B1”, and “big jackpot C1”, a short-time game state of a normal symbol is also given during probability variation games. Further, the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set until 30 seconds elapses or until 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  Here, the “special symbol probability change gaming state (high probability state)” means a state where the special symbol jackpot probability has increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol probability change). It is a game state that is easily shifted to the game state. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is referred to as a “normal game state of a special symbol (low probability state)”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. The jackpot probability indicates a normal state (a normal state of a special symbol). In addition, the “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased, and the Riu electric character is a game ball provided along with the second entrance 64b. Is a game state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 64b. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. .

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, the short time period of the normal symbol and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the number of rounds at the jackpot according to the jackpot type Is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is set may be changed according to the type of jackpot. For example, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A1”, after the “Big Jack A1” is finished, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery is completed three times. "After the special symbol lottery is completed six times after the end, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued. When the" big hit C1 "is reached, the normal symbol is drawn until the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the" big hit C1 "ends. The short state may be continued at this time.

  Furthermore, instead of increasing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, the time to open the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the second entrance 64b or the electric symbol is released at one normal symbol hit. The number of times may be changed. Further, in this embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol short-time state”, but after the “special symbol high-probability state”, the “normal symbol short-time state” You may comprise so that it may become. Instead of the special symbol lottery count, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 650 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 640. FIG. Actually, a cover body is disposed on the front surface side, and the cover body is formed of a member through which the inside can be seen through, so that the inside can be viewed. In the present embodiment, the inside is a visible member, but the inside is not visible, and it may be configured so that it is not possible to know which is the state in which the inside is allocated by just looking at the sorting unit. Good. Thereby, a player's attention can be directed to the navigation display (for example, FIG. 8) which suggests which state is allocated to later.

  At the upper part of the sorting unit 640, there is provided a passage opening through which a game ball can enter. It is distributed to either the second entrance 650b. The sorting member 900 is switched every predetermined time between a position where the game ball is distributed to the first gate 650a and a position where the game ball is distributed to the second gate 650b. This switching operation is performed by energizing a solenoid (not shown) connected to the shaft of the sorting member 900 around the shaft (not shown) of the sorting member 900, which triggers the occurrence of a big hit. The switching operation is started, and the switching operation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereby, power consumption can be suppressed by switching the distribution member 900 only when it is necessary to enter the first gate 650a and the second gate 650b.

  Here, FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating a case where the sorting member 900 is stopped in a state of being tilted to the right position. In this case, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, the game ball is guided to the first gate 650a by the sorting member 900 tilted to the right position. FIG. 3B is a diagram illustrating a case where the sorting member 900 is stopped in a state of being tilted to the left position. In this case, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, the game ball is guided to the second gate 650b by the sorting member 900 tilted to the left position.

  The pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state” when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power. Thereafter, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and to the “time-short state of the normal symbol”. When the state shifts to the “high probability state of special symbol”, the state is continued from the end of the special symbol jackpot until the next special symbol lottery wins, regardless of the type of jackpot. When the next jackpot is not a probable jackpot (the jackpot A2, jackpot B2 or jackpot C2), the state returns to the “low probability state of special symbol”.

  In addition, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from the “normal symbol normal state” to the “normal symbol short-time state”, the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the special symbol jackpot ends. Will continue until. On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, the state returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”.

  If the special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, the “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further increased after the special symbol jackpot ends. It continues until the lottery ends 100 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “normal symbol short-time state”, when the new special symbol wins in the fifth special symbol lottery, the “ordinary symbol short-time state” further increases the new jackpot. It is continued until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the end. In other words, in the present embodiment, while the “ordinary symbol time-saving state” is continued, each time a new special symbol jackpot is reached, a short-term period (“ The duration of “short time state of normal symbol” is updated.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with the entry (start winning prize) to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is being executed. A variation display is performed, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state as a stop symbol after the variation ends, or the first entrance port 64a or the second entrance port 64b. The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the spheres that have entered the ball, is indicated by a lighting state.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64a while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the maximum number of times the ball is held is four times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81, and even when the ball enters the second entrance 64b, the number of entrances is a maximum of four times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that the entrance to the 1st entrance 64a and the 2nd entrance 64b could be suspended up to 4 times each, the maximum number of times of suspension was limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. The LED 37a is configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state of a special symbol) with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the light emission colors. And normal symbols, etc.). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A1, big hit A2, big hit B1, Special symbols (first symbol) corresponding to jackpot B2, jackpot C1, jackpot C2) are shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is jackpot A or jackpot B, all the numbers from “0” to “9” may be set regardless of the jackpot type. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect (pseudo-interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed during the big hit round in a predetermined period (special variation period) after the jackpot ends. Yes. In order to effectively perform this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured such that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type according to the type of main symbol displayed when the jackpot is won. In the case of a big hit C, a chance eye composed of “341” breaks is displayed. In this embodiment, the chance chance is one type of “341”, but is not limited to this, and it may be composed of other random eyes, or one of the reach misses may be set as the chance eye. Good.

  The change display of the special symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is not performed at the same time, and only one of them is performed. When the reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are respectively stored, the variation of the special symbol set as the priority is set based on the priority set in the gaming state. The In the present embodiment, in the gaming state other than the normal symbol is set to the short-time gaming state (the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state in which the short-time state is not set (100 times after the jackpot C)), the variation of the special symbol 1 Is preferentially executed. On the other hand, in the game state in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set, the variation of the special symbol 2 is executed with priority.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15A to 15B, the jackpot based on the passage of the first gate 650a is set so that only the jackpot of 10 rounds is selected, and the second gate 650b. The jackpot based on the passage of the four rounds is set so that the four-round jackpot is selected with a 50% probability and the 16-round jackpot is selected with a 50% probability. As the ratio of jackpots for shifting to the high probability gaming state, the jackpot based on the passage of the first gate 650a and the jackpot based on the passage of the second gate 650b are 50%, and are configured at the same ratio.

  Returning to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of reserved balls and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into left, middle, and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved sphere) among the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64a, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting it out.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64a while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the corresponding sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. Further, the reserved ball of the second entrance 64b is set in the same manner by using a number of retained balls different from that of the first entrance 64a.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the entrance to the 1st entrance 64a or the 2nd entrance 64b might be each hold | maintained up to 4 times, the maximum number of reserve balls is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, in place of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the four divided areas are different by the number of reserved balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls for the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed in accordance with the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is being executed, and ends the variation. As a later stop symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol and the symbol “×” are alternately turned on. Display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b operates for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the second entrance 64b. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times, like the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, but 3 times or less, or You may set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64a and a second entrance 64b through which a sphere can enter are disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64a, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws the special symbol 1 and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. Similarly, when the ball enters the second entrance 64b, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. As a result, the main controller 110 draws the special symbol 2 and the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b are also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. Although details will be described later, a winning ball which is the number of balls won in the switch reading process (S101) of the main controller 110 due to the turning on of the first entrance switch or the second entrance switch. The number and the number of acquired balls, which is the number of balls paid out as a winning ball, are stored in the winning detection information area 203m.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first and second entrances 64a and 64b, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (a large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. Yes. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed in the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed so as to become a big hit stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (five-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64a, 64b, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). In the ball discharge path (not shown), a transmission type out port sensor 66a that makes it possible to detect that a game ball has passed through the out port is disposed. Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the out port sensor 66a, an out ball detection command is output to the sound lamp control device 114 to notify that the game ball has passed through the out port 66. ing.

  In addition, the game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill.

  As shown in FIG. 4, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box Cut to the cover side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the game information input screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. In the following description, the case where the game end time is set to 21:00 and the target difference ball is set to 1000 balls at 19:00 (current time) will be described as an example. FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display at the time when the frame button 22 is pressed and the game information input screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 6 (a), “set”, “reset”, and “return” buttons are provided on the lower part of the third symbol display device 81 from the left. Fields for inputting “time” and “target difference ball” are provided, and a cursor is displayed in the time field of the game end time.

  Here, by depressing the upper switch 270a twice, the numerical value in the time column of the game end time is changed to 21. The numerical value changes from 19 to 20, 21 in accordance with the depression of the upper switch 270a. Next, the right switch 270b is pressed twice to move the cursor position to the 1000 position in the target difference column. Then, the target difference ball is changed to 1000 balls by pressing the upper switch once. Thereafter, when the right switch is pressed twice, the cursor position moves to the setting button, and the display changes to a display indicating that the setting button is being selected (FIG. 6B). By pressing the frame button 22 in this state, the game end time is set to 21:00 and the target difference ball is set to 1000 balls.

  Next, an example of navigation display when a jackpot occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. First, on the third symbol display device 81, a symbol that is a big hit is displayed, and when a big hit occurs, a display that suggests the occurrence of a big hit (FIG. 7A) is displayed, and a display that explains the method of starting the big hit game (FIG. 7B) is displayed. More specifically, an explanation that a jackpot game is started by passing a game ball through the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b is displayed, and the contents of the jackpot game obtained by each gate (for example, 10R) Etc.) is displayed. If game information has been input, an indication of which gate is recommended based on the game end time, target difference ball and current time of the game information (the left gate is recommended in FIG. 7B). ) Is displayed. Furthermore, when the time from the current time to the game end time is within a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes), the predicted difference ball number at the time of game end is displayed together with the contents of the jackpot game. This eliminates the need for the player to calculate the predicted difference ball at the end of the game, and allows the player to easily make a determination when selecting a gate.

  After the display (FIG. 7B) for explaining the method of starting the jackpot game is displayed, the navigation display suggesting which gate the game ball is guided to in the third symbol display device 81 Is displayed (FIGS. 8A to 8B). The distribution member 900 that distributes the game balls that have entered the distribution unit 640 to one of the gates is configured to switch positions at predetermined time intervals. FIG. 8A is a display that suggests that it is the timing at which the game ball that has entered the sorting unit 640 is guided to the first gate 650a, and the remaining time until the position of the sorting member 900 is switched, The five frames on the back of the “open” display at the bottom of the screen are displayed by turning on or off. Specifically, when the position of the sorting member 900 is switched to a position for guiding the sphere to the first gate 650a, all of the five frames are turned on, and the remaining time has elapsed 1/5 (in this embodiment, Every 1 second), the rightmost of the lit frames is turned off. When all the frames are turned off, the position of the sorting member 900 is switched. FIG. 8B shows a display suggesting that the game ball that has entered the sorting unit 640 is at the timing of being guided to the second gate 650b, and the remaining time is displayed in the same manner as described above.

  Next, an example of display when the game end time is reached will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the following description, the game end time is set to 21:00, the target difference ball is set to 1000 balls, and the case where the game is ended when the current time is 21:00 is described as an example. Do. When the current time is 21:00, which is the game end time, a display (FIG. 9A) indicating that it is the game end time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In FIG. 9A, in order to suggest that it is a game end time and to check whether or not to play a game by extending the game end time, “extend”, “ There is a button "Do not extend". In the initial state, the cursor is in a position of “do not extend” and the “do not extend” button is lit. The cursor position can be changed by pressing the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d. Next, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the cursor position is “not extended”, the game result is displayed (FIG. 9B). The game result displays the date and time of game play, game time, target difference ball, difference ball result, and the like. In addition, a comment based on the target difference ball and the difference ball result is displayed. If the frame button 22 is pressed while the cursor position is “extend”, a game information input screen (FIG. 6) is displayed. By newly entering game information, the game end time is extended and the game is played. Can continue.

  With reference to FIG. 10A, an example of display for selecting whether or not to continue the game using the game information stored in the backup area will be described. This display is displayed when the game information is input and when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the game information is stored in the backup area and the power is restored. In order to confirm whether or not to continue the game using the game information stored in the backup area, buttons “Continue” and “Do not continue” are provided at the bottom of the screen from the left. In the initial state, the cursor is in the position of “do not continue”, and the “do not continue” button is lit. The cursor position can be changed by pressing the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d, and can be selected by pressing the frame button 22. When “Continue” is selected, the navigation game is started with the game information stored in the backup area, and when “Do not continue” is selected, the navigation game is not started.

  FIG. 10B is a diagram schematically showing the frame button 22 and the selection switches 270 (a) to (d). An upper switch 270a is provided on the frame button 22, a right switch 270b on the right, a lower switch 270c on the lower side, and a left switch 270d on the left side. As described above, the frame button 22 and the selection switches 270 (a) to (d) are used to input game information on the game information input screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), It is operated by the player when changing the stage or changing the contents of the super reach.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second per-random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial-value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 35). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203 i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are synchronized with the timing of entering the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Each value is stored separately. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is a big jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot. The first random number table 202a is used for a special symbol with a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability (special with a high probability that the special symbol will be a big hit from the low probability. It is divided into two types: for a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the first random number table 202a (FIG. 14B) includes a first random number table 202a for a low probability and a first random number table 202 for a high probability. The number of random numbers included in the jackpot is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first per random number table 202a for the special symbol with a low probability and the first per random number table 202a for the special symbol with a high probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball has won the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per-random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0-2” is the first per-random number for the low probability. It is stored in the table 202a (see FIG. 14B). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that a special symbol jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0-29” is a first per-random number table 202a (FIG. ))). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “3/40”.

  In addition, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 14C). The first hit type selection table 202b includes a first gate selection table (FIG. 15 (a)) used when a sphere passes the first gate 650a after the big hit occurs, and the sphere passes the second gate 650b. There is a second gate selection table (FIG. 15B) used in this case, and the jackpot type is determined based on the first gate selection table or the second gate selection table. As shown in FIG. 15 (a), the jackpot type lottery result based on the passage of the first gate indicates that the jackpot type when the random value is “0 to 49” in the first hit type counter C2 is “big jackpot”. A1 ". The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot A2”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), the jackpot type lottery result based on the passage of the second gate is the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 24” in the first hit type counter C2. “Big hit B1”. The jackpot type when the value is “25 to 49” is “jackpot C1”. The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 74” is “big jackpot B2”, and the jackpot type when the value is “75 to 99” is “jackpot C2”.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), the stop type selection counter C3 returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, a range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random number range corresponding to the stop type of “completely off” is as low as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64a. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. Further, in the low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64a, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variation time refers to the time from the start of the variation of the special symbol until the symbol is stopped and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, when the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is fixed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). It is written as. Based on this variation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16B to 16D) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS1 is a counter value that is also acquired by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the variation starts.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16B to 16D), for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, “disconnect (for a long time)”, “disconnect (for a short time)”, “disconnect normal reach”. ”,“ Outgoing Super Reach ”,“ Outgoing Special Reach ”are defined, and variation patterns for jackpots are defined as“ Obtain Normal Reach ”,“ October Super Reach ”,“ October Special Reach ” Yes. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a big hit). Note that, as the variation time of the variation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is defined.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 16A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is When the value of the random number that is the winning set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 16A) matches, it is determined that the normal symbol is won. This second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that a special symbol jackpot is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64a is opened “only once for 0.2 seconds”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64a is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, you may open "0.5 second x 2 times".

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64a is opened “2 times per second”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64a is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64a. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C 4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64a is opened only “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 35), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 34) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. The special symbol 2 held ball counter 203e, the normal symbol held ball counter 203f, the probability changing flag 203g, the hour / short counter 203h, the pre-reading probability changing flag 203i, the counter buffer 203j, and the big hit flag 203k, It has a winning detection information storage area 203m, a gate time counter 203n, and other memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first entrance 64a (special symbol 1), and includes one execution area, four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and In these areas, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the area numbers (first to 4th) are stored in order from the smallest. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the older winning is stored in the area, and data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area (holding first area to holding third area) having a smaller area number. Done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64a (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, lottery drawing of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the special symbol 1 or The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize Then, various information (whether it is determined, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated).

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second entrance 64b (special symbol 2), and the first entrance 64a (special The only difference is that the symbol 1) is changed to the second entrance 64b (special symbol 2), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winnings stored in other reserved areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to a reserved area with a smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol (third symbol) that is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64a (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Every time a ball enters the first entrance 64a and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added (see S504 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 25).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 25 and S505 in FIG. 28). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number-of-holding balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and displays a hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls whenever the number of held balls changes. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the retained ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 64b (special symbol 2). This special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the first entrance (special symbol 1) is changed to the second entrance 64b (special symbol 2). However, since the other points are the same, the detailed description is omitted. Note that the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the processing of S510 in FIG. 28, and is subtracted by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 25). Further, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 25, S511 in FIG. 28). reference).

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol normal display (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes the normal entrance 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S804 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 30).

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (FIG. 31). S803: No).

  The probability changing flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability changing flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 If the value of the probability changing flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The probability changing flag 203g has an initial value set to zero. In the main controller 110, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed at the final round of the big hit (that is, the big hit end timing). ON or OFF is set according to the jackpot type. Specifically, “ON” is set for “big hit A1,” “big hit B1,” and “big hit C1”, and OFF is set for “big hit A2,” “big hit B2,” and “big hit C2.”

  When the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 27) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 26) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process, the value of the probability variation flag 203g is referred to. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is OFF, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the ordinary symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203h is set to zero. In the main controller 110, the timing for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the final round of jackpot A and jackpot B (that is, jackpot) A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set in (end timing). Specifically, 100 is set for all jackpot types. After that, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is finished until the value of the hour / middle counter 203h becomes 0 (S221 in FIG. 25).

  When the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second per random number table for the low probability (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 30).

  The pre-reading probability changing flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (special symbol high probability state) at the time of prefetching the lottery result (S603 or S604 in FIG. 29). If the value of the pre-reading probability changing flag 203i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state at the time of prefetching the lottery result. If the value of the pre-reading probability changing flag 203i is off, the lottery result This indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a special symbol (a low probability state of a special symbol) at the time of prefetching. The pre-reading probability changing flag 203i is set to an initial value of zero, and when the main controller 110 acquires a lottery result in the pre-reading process of the special symbol lottery result and the jackpot lottery result is acquired, On or off is set according to the jackpot type (S607 or S609 in FIG. 29). Specifically, “ON” is set for “big hit A1,” “big hit B1,” and “big hit C1”, and OFF is set for “big hit A2,” “big hit B2,” and “big hit C2.”

  When the start winning process (FIG. 28) is executed by the MPU 201 and it is determined that the game ball has newly won, the prefetch process (FIG. 29) is performed. In the pre-reading process, the value of the pre-reading probability changing flag 203i is referred to. If the value of the pre-reading probability changing flag 203i is OFF, the special symbol lottery result is pre-read based on the first per-random number table 202a for low probability.

  As described above, the counter buffer 203j is a buffer area used for counting each counter value.

  The jackpot flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203k is on, the position of the sorting member 900 is switched every predetermined time by the gate processing (FIG. 38) by the MPU 201, and the jackpot type determination processing (FIG. 36) by the MPU 201 The jackpot type is selected based on the game ball passing through the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b.

  The winning detection information storage area 203m includes the number of winning game balls (the number of winning balls) based on the winning of game balls in the general winning slot 63, the first winning slot 64a, and the second winning slot 64b. This is an area for storing the number of game balls (acquired ball number) that can be acquired in advance according to the winning opening. The winning detection information storage area 203m stores a value corresponding to a winning of a game ball detected in a switch reading process (S101) executed in the main controller 110 described later, and a sensor executed in the main controller 110. Based on the value stored in the detection process (S109), a winning ball detection command is set and the value is initialized.

  The gate time counter 203n is a counter for measuring a predetermined time for switching the position of the sorting member 900 for a predetermined time. The gate time counter 203n is incremented by 1 in a gate control process (S1402) executed in the main controller 110, which will be described later. When the value reaches 1250, it is initialized to 0 and the position of the distribution member 900 is changed. It is configured to switch. Here, since the gate control process (S1402) is executed every 4 ms, the sorting member 900 can be switched every 5 seconds.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with the ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 14A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 14A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. Yes.

  As described above, the first per-random number table 202a is a table in which the value of a random number that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first per random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (a first per random number table 202a for a low probability) and a special symbol high There is a table (first high random number table 202a for high probability) for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at the probability, and the number of random numbers that are a big hit included in each table is different. Yes. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  In the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14C), the first gate selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 15A) used based on the passage through the first gate 650a and the second gate 650b. A second gate selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 15B) used based on the passage is included. The first gate selection table 202b1 and the second gate selection table 202b2 are data tables in which determination values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are set for each jackpot type.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the first gate selection table 202b1 is set so that the jackpot A1 and the jackpot A2 can be selected, respectively. As the judgment value of the jackpot A1, the value “1” of the first hit type counter C2 is set. “0 to 49” is set as “50 to 99” as the determination value of the jackpot A2. Further, as shown in FIG. 15B, the second gate selection table 202b2 is set so that the big hit B1, the big hit B2, the big hit C1, and the big hit C2 can be selected, respectively. The value “0-24” of the hit type counter C2 is “25-49” as the judgment value of the jackpot B2, “50-74” is the judgment value of the jackpot C1, and “75-99” is the judgment value of the jackpot C2. "Is set for each.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 16A) is a data table in which the hit determination value for the normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 16A, when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is normal. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened for "0.2 seconds x once".

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the short time state of the normal symbol), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit when the value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 14D) is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 (d), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a dedicated jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 16 (b)) in the case where the success / failure determination result is a jackpot, and the success / failure determination. If the result is out of play and the game state is normal, a dedicated out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 16 (c)) and the result of the determination is out of control and the game state is probable game state. Each of them is configured at least by a use (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 16D). In addition, although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern selection table for a short-time gaming state is set.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various switches 208 include sensors (not shown) for detecting winning balls.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 pays out the winning balls one by one continuously. More specifically, every time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation), one prize ball is paid out. Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). Further, every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is paused for a predetermined period (1 second). Thereby, for example, when a large amount of prize balls need to be paid out, such as during a big hit, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 216 from paying out the prize balls without taking a break and to prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the pachinko machine 10 due to, for example, the resin portion or the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 being melted due to heat generated by the dispensing motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable part of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the part touched by the player such as the lower tray unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. This can be suppressed. Note that the number of payouts and the payout pause period until the payout motor 216 stops paying out the prize balls are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout motor 216 may be configured to pause payout every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out. For example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and variation pattern effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, selection switches 270 (a) to (d), RTC 260, and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. .

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, displays a game information input screen (FIG. 6) for inputting game information, The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect content at the time of super reach, and to the display control device 114. Instruct. When the game information input screen is displayed, a display game information input start command is transmitted to the display control device 114, and when the stage is changed, the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to display it, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors inputs from the selection switches 270 (a) to (d), and the selection switches 270 (a) to (d) are operated, for example, while the game information input screen (FIG. 6) is being displayed. When the selection switches 270 (a) to (d) are operated by the player while the necessary screen is displayed, a display input screen update command for updating the display of the game information input screen is displayed on the display control device. 114.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern table and a navigation selection table 222a. The variation pattern table is already well known and will be described briefly. However, based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough variation contents (variation time, variation type) indicated by the variation pattern command are described. (Reach, miss, etc.)) to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the navigation selection table 222a defines the navigation type to be selected depending on the number of remaining target rounds, whether or not the game time is at the end of the game, and whether or not there is a big hit in the hold. The remaining target round number is calculated from the target difference ball inputted in the game information, the value (P1) of the total driving ball counter 223i1 of the game information totaling area 223i, and the value (P2) of the total acquired ball counter 223i2. It is calculated by dividing the difference from the current difference ball number (P2-P1) by the 1R difference ball number, and whether or not the game time is at the end of the game is determined by the current time storage area 223q. It is determined whether or not the time from the current time, which is the data of the game, to the game end time, which is the data of the game information storage area 223h, is within a predetermined time (within 30 minutes in the present embodiment). Whether or not there is a jackpot depends on whether or not there is winning information that will be a jackpot in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 in the winning information storage area 223a. It is those determined.

  If the number of remaining target rounds is less than or equal to 0 (that is, the current number of difference balls exceeds the target difference ball), whether or not the game is at the end of the game The navigation type A that is a display that leaves the selection to the player (that is, does not display which gate is recommended) is selected. This is because the target difference ball is already exceeded, and the target difference ball is reached (reached) regardless of which gate is selected.

  When the remaining target number of rounds is 1 to 4, the navigation type B which is a display recommending the second gate 650b is selected regardless of whether the game is at the end of the game or whether there is a big hit in the hold. The This is because the jackpot type selected by passing the game ball through the second gate 650b is B1, B2 which is a big hit of 4 rounds, or C1, C2 which is a big hit of 16 rounds, so which jackpot type is selected. This is because even if it is done, the target difference ball can be reached.

  When the remaining target round number is 5 to 10 and there is no big hit in the hold, the navigation type C which is a display recommending the first gate 650a is selected regardless of whether or not the game is in the final stage. On the other hand, when there is a big hit in the hold, the navigation type B that is a display recommending the second gate 650b is selected regardless of whether or not the game is in the final stage. This is because the jackpot type selected by the game ball passing through the first gate 650a is A1 and A2 which are jackpots of 10 rounds, so that regardless of which jackpot type is selected, the target difference ball is reached. Because it can be done. In addition, when there is a big hit in the hold, even if the game ball is passed through the second gate 650b and B1 or B2 which is a big hit in four rounds is selected, the game ball is put in the first gate 650a in the big hit in the hold. This is because the target difference ball can be reached by passing. The second gate 650b, which may not reach the target difference first when there is a big hit in the hold, is recommended because the target difference is reached in the selection of the big hit type of the second gate 650b. Even if the four-round jackpot types B1 and B2 are selected and the player wakes up, it will be possible to produce a jackpot that is unexpected for the player, and improve the player's interest Because it can. However, in the present embodiment, the second gate 650b that may not reach the target difference first is recommended when there is a big hit in the hold. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it recommend the 1st gate 650a which reaches a difference ball. Thereby, anxiety that the target difference may not be reached can be removed earlier than in the present embodiment, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  When the remaining target round number is 11 to 14, the reservation is not a big hit, and the game is not at the end of the game, the navigation type C which is a display recommending the first gate 650a is selected. The purpose of this is to steadily approach the target difference ball because the game time still remains until the game end time. On the other hand, when there is a big hit in the hold or at the end of the game, the navigation type B that is a display recommending the second gate 650b is selected. This is not the end of the game, but if there is a big hit in the hold, even if the game ball is passed through the second gate 650b and B1 or B2, which is a big hit in four rounds, is selected, This is because the target difference ball can be reached by passing the game ball through one gate 650a. The second gate 650b, which may not reach the target difference first when there is a big hit in the hold, is recommended because the target difference is reached in the selection of the big hit type of the second gate 650b. Even if the four-round jackpot types B1 and B2 are selected and the player wakes up, it will be possible to produce a jackpot that is unexpected for the player, and improve the player's interest Because it can. Also, when the game is at the end of the game, the game time is not enough and it is necessary to reach the target difference in this jackpot game, so the target difference is reached in this jackpot game (16 rounds). The second gate 650b is recommended, which is a possibility that the jackpot game will be selected).

  When the remaining target round number is 15 to 16 and it is not the end of the game, the navigation type C which is a display recommending the first gate 650a is selected regardless of whether or not there is a big hit in the hold. This is because the game time still remains until the game end time, so it aims to steadily approach the target difference ball. If there is a hold, by selecting the first gate 650a even in the hold jackpot This is because the target difference ball can be reached. On the other hand, when the game is in the final stage, there is not enough game time left and it is necessary to reach the target difference in this jackpot game, so the target difference is reached in this jackpot game (16 rounds). The second gate 650b, which is likely to be a jackpot game), is recommended.

  When the remaining target round number is 17 or more and it is not the end of the game, the navigation type C which is a display recommending the first gate 650a is selected regardless of whether there is a big hit in the hold. The purpose of this is to steadily approach the target difference ball because the game time still remains until the game end time. On the other hand, when the game is in the final stage, there is not enough game time left and it is necessary to reach the target difference in this jackpot game, so the target difference is reached in this jackpot game (16 rounds). The second gate 650b, which is likely to be a jackpot game), is recommended.

  As described above, the navigation selection table 222a should be appropriately designed according to the game value obtained in the jackpot game, and is not limited to the contents described above. Further, when a plurality of jackpots are included in the hold, a separate table may be prepared and defined. Thereby, the navigation display for reaching the target difference ball can be selected with higher accuracy. Further, information on the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b selected by the player when the jackpot is generated may be recorded, and the contents of the table may be changed based on the recorded information.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and a variation start flag 223d. Stop type selection flag 223e, game information input flag 223f, button effect prohibition flag 223g, game information storage area 223h, game information total area 223i, navigation game flag 223j, extension confirmation flag 223k, continuation confirmation flag 223m, continuation confirmation in progress At least a flag 223n, a cursor position storage area 223p, a current time storage area 223q, an input area 223r, a power-off flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (the first area to the fourth area for the special symbol 1 and the first area to the fourth area for the special symbol 2). In each of these areas, winning information is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information includes an area number among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area) of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. It is stored in order from the (first to fourth) small areas. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls on hold (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuating effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64a, or in main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1607 in FIG. 36). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the stored special symbol 1 held ball number. In order to notify the value of the counter 223 b to the display control device 114, a display reservation ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, has a maximum number of four reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the special symbol 2 held in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts up to once. The number of reserved balls is added to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b by entering the second entrance 64b, and is different from the display of the reserved ball number symbol of the special symbol 1 on the third symbol display device 81. Since it is different only in the point used for the display of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 and others are the same, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the main controller 110. Can be changed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 42), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3702 in FIG. 60). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 42), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3707 in FIG. 60). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The game information input flag 223f and the button effect prohibition flag 223g are set to off in the initial state. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the game information input screen can be displayed (period in which the frame button 22 or the effects required for the operation of the selection switches 270 (a) to (d) are not displayed), (S2704 in FIG. 50), a game information input screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2705 in FIG. 50). When this game information input flag 223f is set to ON, processing based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the selection switches 270 (a) to (d) corresponding to the displayed game information input screen is executed. (S2701 in FIG. 50: Yes). Further, when the button effect prohibition flag 223g is set to ON, the effect that requires pressing the frame button is not displayed while the game information input screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . When the frame button is pressed when the cursor position is set, reset, or returned on the game information input screen, the display of the game information input screen is terminated and set to off (FIG. 56). S3314). As a result, an effect necessary to press the frame button is displayed, and processing based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the selection switches 270 (a) to (d) corresponding to the effect can be performed. . In the present embodiment, the game information input flag is used when it is desired not to display the effects required for the operation of the frame button 22 or the selection switches 270 (a) to (d) except during the display of the game information input screen. 223f and the button effect prohibition flag 223g are prepared separately, so that the button effect prohibition flag 223g is set to be turned on / off, so that it has a highly expandable configuration. In such a case, it may be configured such that an effect necessary to operate the frame button 22 or the selection switches 270 (a) to 270 (d) is not displayed. Thereby, the button effect prohibition flag 223g can be made unnecessary, and the area of the RAM 223 can be saved.

  The game information storage area 223h includes a game time storage area 223h1 and a target difference ball storage area 223h2, and stores game information (game end time, target difference ball) input on the game information input screen (FIG. 6) described above. In order to determine the display mode of the navigation display (FIG. 8) (S2106 or S2108 in FIG. 44), determine whether the game is at the end (S2105 in FIG. 44), or determine the end of the game. This is an area used for (S3404 in FIG. 57). In the initial state, the game end time, which is data in the game time storage area 223h1, is set to 0:00, and the target difference ball, which is data in the target difference ball storage area 223h2, is set to 0 balls. In the game information input screen (FIG. 6), if the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is set and no error occurs (eg, the game end time is before the current time), the game time storage area 223h1 is displayed. A game end time is set in the target difference ball storage area 223h2. The game time storage area 223h1 and the target difference ball storage area 223h2 are initialized when the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is extended on the above-described game extension confirmation screen (FIG. 9A). (S3512 in FIG. 58). In addition, the game information input screen (FIG. 6) is also initialized when the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is reset (S3309 in FIG. 56). Thereby, when the game end time has arrived or when the player voluntarily ends the game, the game information can be initialized, and then the game information that has been input by another player who plays the game. Can never be referenced.

  The game information totaling area 223i includes a total driving ball counter 223i1, a total acquired ball counter 223i2, a start difference ball storage area 223i3, and a 1R difference ball storage area 223i4. The total number of shots counter 223i1 indicates the total number of balls (total number of shots) that the player has struck to the front of the game board 13 after the game information is input, and the total number of shots counter 223i2 , The total number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) acquired by the player since the game information is input is indicated in the start difference ball storage area 223i3 as the total number of hit balls at the start of the jackpot game. In the 1R difference ball storage area 223i4, the number of balls acquired per 1R substantially obtained in the previous jackpot game is stored.

  The total number of hit balls 223i1 is based on the game balls entering the general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64a, the second winning hole 64b, the special winning hole 65a, the out hole 66 or the normal winning hole 67. When the winning ball detection command or the out ball detection command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, it is updated (S2402 in FIG. 47, S2502 in FIG. 48). The value of the total pitched ball number counter 223i1 is a calculation of the remaining target round number which is information for selecting the type of navigation display (S2104 in FIG. 44), and the game end displayed in the navigation display (FIG. 8). It is used for calculation of the number of predicted difference balls at the time (S2109 in FIG. 44).

  The total winning ball number counter 223i2 is based on the main control device based on the game balls entering the general winning port 63, the first winning port 64a, the second winning port 64b, the special winning port 65a, or the normal winning port 67. When the winning ball detection command transmitted from 110 is received, it is updated (S2402 in FIG. 47). The value of the total acquired ball number counter 223i2 is calculated based on the calculation of the remaining target round number (S2104 in FIG. 44), which is information for selecting the type of navigation display, and the game end time displayed in the navigation display (FIG. 8). It is used for calculation of the number of predicted difference balls at the time (S2109 in FIG. 44).

  The start difference ball storage area 223i3 stores the number of difference balls between the total number of hit balls and the total number of acquired balls when the big hit game is started (S2202 in FIG. 45). The value of the start difference ball storage area 223i3 is referred to when the jackpot game is ended, and is used to calculate the number of balls substantially acquired by the player in the jackpot game (S2303 in FIG. 46).

  The 1R difference ball storage area 223i4 shows the difference between the difference between the total number of hit balls and the total number of acquired balls and the difference in the start difference ball storage area 223i3 described above when the big hit game is terminated. The value divided by the number of rounds is stored (S2303 in FIG. 46). Thereby, the average value of the number of acquired balls substantially obtained in one round of the jackpot game can be calculated. By using this value, the number of acquired balls that the player can actually obtain for the calculation of the predicted difference ball number (S2109 in FIG. 44) at the game end time displayed in the navigation display (FIG. 8) described above. Since the number of game balls actually obtained by the player is smaller than the displayed predicted difference ball number, dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced. Similarly, in the calculation of the remaining target round number (S2104 in FIG. 44), which is information for selecting the type of navigation display, since it can be calculated with the number of acquired balls that the player can actually obtain, for example, navigation Even if a jackpot game (10R) based on the passage of the first gate 650a in the display is acquired, the first gate is obtained when the number of acquired balls that the player can actually obtain does not reach the target difference ball at the end of the game. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied without reaching the target difference ball even though the player has played the game in accordance with the navigation display without being displayed to recommend 650a.

  The navigation game flag 223j is a flag for setting whether to execute a navigation game, which is executed based on the game information input on the above-described game information input screen, and the initial value is set to off. . The navigation game flag 223j is set to ON when the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is set on the game information input screen and no error occurs (the input game end time is earlier than the current time). (S3304 in FIG. 56). When the navigation game flag 223j is set to ON, the game information storage area is initialized by pressing the frame button 22 when the cursor position is reset on the game information input screen (FIG. 56). S3308: Yes), the navigation game end process is executed in the navigation game process (S1811 in FIG. 49) in the voice lamp control device 113 (S2604: Yes in FIG. 49), and the power-off command is issued in the voice lamp control device 113. In the data storage process (S3817 in FIG. 61), which is a process when the game is received, information related to the navigation game (information in the current time storage area 223q, game information storage area 223h, game information totaling area 223i) is stored in the other registers of the RTC 260. 263b (SS3802 in FIG. 61) Yes).

  The extension confirmation flag 223k displays the game extension confirmation screen (FIG. 9 (a)) when the game information is inputted and the navigation game is being executed and the current time becomes the inputted game end time. 3 is displayed on the symbol display device 81, suggesting that it is a game end time to the player, and is used for confirming whether or not to play a game by extending the game end time. Is set to off. This extension confirmation flag 223k is set to ON when the game information is input and the navigation game is being executed and the current time becomes the input game end time (S3405 in FIG. 57). . When the extension confirmation flag 223k is set to ON, the extension confirmation process is executed in the sound lamp control process 113 (S3402 of FIG. 57: Yes). Thereafter, in the extension confirmation process, when the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is extended or not extended, the process corresponding to the button at the cursor position is performed, and the extension confirmation flag 223k is set. Set to off. As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player that the input game end time has arrived, and the player can extend the game after recognizing that the game end time is predetermined by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game end time from elapses due to the game being too enthusiastic. In this embodiment, the game extension confirmation screen is displayed and the player is selected to extend or not extend. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game end time has elapsed, the game result is automatically set. May be displayed to end the navigation game, or a display indicating that the game end time has arrived may be displayed to the player, or the game end time is automatically extended (for example, 30 minutes). ) Thereby, the operation burden on the player can be reduced, and the player can concentrate on the game.

  The continuation confirmation flag 223m and the continuation confirmation flag 223n are game continuation confirmation screens for confirming whether or not the information related to the navigation game stored at the time of the power interruption is continuously used when the power is restored from the power interruption. (FIG. 10A) is used for display, and both are set to OFF in the initial state. This continuation confirmation flag 223m is used to store the game information data stored in the other register 263b of the RTC 260 in the data reading process (S1610 of FIG. 40) in the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113, in the game information storage area 223h. And when stored in the game information totaling area 223i, it is set to ON (S1705 in FIG. 40). When the continuation confirmation flag 223m is set to ON, the game continuation confirmation screen (FIG. 10 (a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the navigation game process (FIG. 49) of the sound lamp control device 113. The game continuation confirmation start command for display and the continuation confirmation flag 223n for executing the processing based on the switch operation when the game continuation confirmation screen is displayed are set to ON (S2606 in FIG. 49). : Yes). When the display game continuation confirmation start command is set and the continuation confirmation flag 223n is set (on setting), the continuation confirmation flag 223m is set to off (S2606: Yes in FIG. 49).

  When this continuation confirmation flag 223m is set to ON, the navigation system continuation confirmation process for performing processing based on the switch operation while the game continuation confirmation screen is displayed is executed in the audio lamp control device 113 (FIG. 49). S2609: Yes). If the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is extended or not extended by this navigation game continuation confirmation process, the process corresponding to the button at the cursor position is executed, and the continuation confirmation flag 223n is set off. (S3616 in FIG. 59). As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player that the information related to the navigation game stored at the time of the power interruption is continuously available when the power is restored from the power interruption. When the player is switched, it is possible to prevent the game from being started with the game information of another person by selecting not to continue.

  The cursor position storage area 223p is a region that is currently selected or input on the game information input screen (FIG. 6), the game extension confirmation screen (FIG. 9A), or the game continuation confirmation screen (FIG. 10A). It is used to indicate where it is, and the initial state on the game information input screen (FIG. 6) is the position of time 1 of the game end time, and the game extension confirmation screen (FIG. 9 (a)) The initial state at is a position where it is not extended, and the initial state on the game continuation confirmation screen (FIG. 10A) is a position where it is not continued. The cursor position storage area 223p is displayed on the right switch 270b or the left switch on the game information input screen (FIG. 6), the game extension confirmation screen (FIG. 9 (a)) or the game continuation confirmation screen (FIG. 10 (a)). It is changed by pressing 270d. Specifically, for example, in the game extension confirmation screen (FIG. 9A), when the cursor position is not extended, the cursor position is extended when the left switch 270d is pressed. When the cursor position is changed to the position and the cursor position is not extended, the non-extend button that was lit is turned off, and the extend button is lit, so it is visually confirmed that the cursor position has moved to extend. Can be recognized.

  The current time storage area 223q acquires and stores the current time of the time register 263a of the RTC 260 connected to the sound lamp control device 113 via the input / output port 205, and the time of the input game information is an error. This is a region referred to for determination (S3302 in FIG. 56) whether it is (before the current time), determination of whether the game end time has arrived (S3404 in FIG. 57), and the like. This current time storage area 223q stores the date and time information of the time register 263a of the RTC 260 in the navigation game process (FIG. 49) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2601 in FIG. 49). As a result, since the RTC 260 is provided with the backup power source 264, the correct current time can be obtained even when the power is cut off and the game end time has arrived in the navigation game. Whether or not can be accurately determined. In this embodiment, the time information by the RTC 260 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game time during which the navigation game is executed is measured by a process having a timer function separately, not the game end time. The game time may be input, and it may be determined whether or not the game time has elapsed. Thereby, the RTC 260 can be dispensed with, and the cost can be reduced.

  The input area 223r is an area for temporarily storing game information input on the game information input screen (FIG. 6). In this input area 223r, a time 1 input area 223r1 for storing time unit data of the game end time, a time 2 input area 223r2 for storing data of 10 minutes unit of the game end time, and the target difference ball A difference ball 1 input area 223r3 for inputting data of 1000 ball units and a difference ball 2 input area 223r4 for setting data of 1009 units of target difference balls are provided. In the input area 223r, the cursor position is set to the game end time or the target in the switch determination process (FIG. 51) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the switch operation during display of the game information input screen (FIG. 6). If it is a difference ball, it is updated by pressing the upper switch 270a or the lower switch 270c (S2903, S2907, S2911, S2915 in FIG. 52, S3003, S3007, S3011, S3015 in FIG. 53). Based on the value in the input area 223r, a display input screen update command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, thereby updating the display of the game information input screen (FIG. 6). be able to. When the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is set on the game information input screen, the value of the input area 223r is saved in the game information storage area 223h and then initialized (S3303 in FIG. 56). When the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is reset or returned, initialization is performed (S3309 or S3312 in FIG. 56). Here, in this embodiment, when the game information input screen (FIG. 6) is displayed, the current time information in the current time storage area 223q is stored in the time 1 input area 223r1 and the time 2 input area 223r2 of the input area 223r. It is configured to display after setting (S2705 in FIG. 50). Thus, since the game end time is input after the current time, the number of operations for the player to input the game end time rather than the setting start being 0:00. Can be reduced.

  The power-off flag 223y is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 when the main controller 110 detects power-off, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y is turned on. Data storage processing and power-off processing are executed (S1817 and S1818 in FIG. 41). Then, in the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 39), when the power-off flag 223y is on, the RAM work area is cleared and the data reading process is executed, and the power-off flag 223y is set off. (S1609 to S1611 in FIG. 39). As a result, the game information saved by the data storage process at the time of power interruption can be reused by the data reading process at the start-up process at the time of power restoration, and the navigation game is continuously executed. be able to.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 28) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The RTC 260 is an integrated circuit (IC) for measuring a time called a real time clock, and is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 via an input / output port. The RTC 260 includes an MPU 262 for measuring time, a register 263 for storing time information, and a backup power source 264. The register 263 is provided with a time register 263a for storing the date and current time measured by the MPU 262, and another register 264b. The backup power supply 264 is connected to the MPU 262 and the register 263. Therefore, the MPU 262 can continue timing even after the gaming machine is turned off by the backup power source 264, and the information stored in the register is kept. In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off, the information of the game information storage area 223h and the game information totaling area 223i of the RAM of the sound lamp control device 113 is stored in the other register 264b, thereby recovering from the power cut. In addition, the navigation game can be continuously executed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect.

  Here, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbols and the number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol. Since there are models with the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce costs.

  Below, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. After that, it takes a long time to output data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also reads and writes data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Execute data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND type flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for starting up the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. Note that the number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code at the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled in the boot program are read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified in reading the data of the first page. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a and stored.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the end of the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 34) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 23) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 64B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  As a result, after the transfer of image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  Further, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. A period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64a or the second entrance is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when entry to 64b is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S3903 and S3904 in FIG. 62).

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the back A corresponding to the “city stage”, the back B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and the back C corresponding to the “island stage”) are all shown in the third symbol display device. 81. The image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed in 81, and the image controller 237 displays the rear image on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling from left to right in the horizontal direction. Is drawn. As a result, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area in which the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 is in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to produce a change after the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b has been entered. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not immediately started.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data that is resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a predetermined sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the frame buffers of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. Then, it is possible to read out the image of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image of one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame 20 milliseconds after completion of the drawing process for the image for one frame. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By designating them alternately, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to displays related to related commands, displays related to jackpot related commands, round effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the discontinuation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If the jackpot is one of the jackpots C, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the short time period of this normal symbol, the greater the chance that the ball will pass through the normal entrance 67, so there will be more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and there will also be more opportunities to hit the normal symbol. . Therefore, since the chance to release the electric combination due to the big winning of the normal symbol increases, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 64b, and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, since the second entrance 64b is a winning entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters the second entrance. As it becomes easier to enter the ball opening 64b, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or the number of possessed balls is not decreased even when a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the ending effect, the player may make a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol held by notifying that the lottery result of one of the lotteries of the special symbol held will be a big win of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that a game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the display related to the game information related command, the display related to the jackpot related command, the round effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change starts until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. As a result, the fluctuating effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by main controller 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 is displayed in the third symbol. It is possible to specify the third symbol to be easily displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to each of the three symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the 3rd symbol is being displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop effect of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 21) "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The content of the image to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the production mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 22 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (the address “0002H” in FIG. 22 is applicable).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233 f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S3905 in FIG. 62). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S6705 in FIG. 80 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S4201 in FIG. 64B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S4208 in FIG. 64B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 64B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 64 (b) S4209) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 65 to 76) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 77 to 79) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6601 in FIG. 80A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 23) described below describing the contents of image drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 77 (b) ) (See S4203)), a pointer update process (see S6305 in FIG. 79) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 23), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 16, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Character 1, Effect 2, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol display display). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be arranged on the most back side, and the last drawn sprite can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production time of effects displayed based on the display data table in accordance with the storage of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 64 (b) The time counter 233h is decremented by 1 each time the display setting process (see) is executed (see S6307 in FIG. 77). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be executed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 81) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the MPU 231 It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6813 in FIG. 81). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6814 in FIG. 81). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6902 in FIG. 82).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 64B) is executed (see S6902 in FIG. 82).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame 20 milliseconds after completion of the drawing process for the image for one frame. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By designating them alternately, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored in the winning detection information storage area 203m.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64a is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the through gate passing process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and then the sensor detection process is executed (S109). The sensor detection process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S110), and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the change in the special symbol 2) Display suspension number N2) is acquired (S203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is a variable sphere holding ball in the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0. If it is determined (S204: No), it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1). ) Is determined to be 0 (S209: No), it is determined that there is no fluctuating display holding ball in the special symbol, and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205). ), A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the hold first area → execution area, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is determined to be 0 (S204: No), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is determined to be greater than 0. (S209: Yes), the same process as the process for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 described above is performed for the reserved ball of the special symbol 1. The special symbol 1 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If S has not passed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the change time of the change display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 26 or a special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol 2 variation start process or the special symbol 1 variation start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Thus, the stop symbol of special symbol 2 or special symbol 1 is set.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the process of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol display (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether the symbol is a big hit (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON (S218), a jackpot command is set (S219), and the process proceeds to S222.

  The jackpot type is selected by the passage of the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b in the jackpot type determination process of the main process described later by the jackpot flag 203k set to ON in the process of S218. A specific description will be given in the jackpot type determination process (FIG. 36) described later.

  Also, the jackpot command set in the process of S219 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) described later is executed by the MPU 201. Among them, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot command, it transmits the display jackpot command to the display control device 114 (see S2002 in FIG. 43) and displays the navigation type command for display by the navigation process (S2003 in FIG. 43). Is transmitted to the display control device 114. Thereby, a display (FIG. 7A) that suggests the occurrence of a jackpot is displayed, and a display that prompts the player to enter the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b (FIGS. 7B and 8). Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S217, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S220). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S220: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S221), and the process proceeds to S222. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour / middle counter 203h is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped and the process proceeds to S222.

  In the process of S222 executed after the process of S219 or S221, the lighting of the LED which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S216 and the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81 are performed. A stop command is set to synchronize (S222).

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S208). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 2 variation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 of the special symbol 2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Each value is acquired (S301). Next, in order to determine whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by the processing of S301 is a big win of the special symbol 2, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S302). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203g is on (greater than 0).

  When it is determined that the probability changing flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), a lottery result as to whether or not the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a is acquired ( The process proceeds to S303) and S305. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per-random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value (FIG. 14B) at the time of high probability in the first per-random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S303). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “30 to 399”, it is determined that it is out (see FIG. 14B). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability changing flag 203g is not on (S302: No), a lottery result indicating whether or not the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot determination value at the low probability of the first hit random number table 202a is acquired. (S304), the process proceeds to S305. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value (FIG. 14B) at the low probability of the first random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S304). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 2”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “3 to 399”, it is determined that it is out (see FIG. 14B). ).

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S303 or S304 is a jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 is a jackpot (S305: Yes), the jackpot Is set (S306). In the processing of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the jackpot symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the processing of S301. The stop type to be displayed is determined. For example, as the stop type, “front / rear out of reach”, “reach other than front / rear out of reach”, “complete out of reach”, and the like are defined.

  Next, in the process of S307, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the display mode set in the process of S306. Further, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S307). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203j of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 16B) of the variation pattern selection table 202d. Specifically, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0-50”, the normal reach is in the range of “51-179”, the super reach is in the range of “51-179”, and the special reach is in the range of “180-198”. A variation pattern is determined (see FIG. 16B).

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 is out (S305: No), the display mode of out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. The stop type to be displayed is determined. For example, as the stop type, “front / rear out of reach”, “reach other than front / rear out of reach”, “complete out of reach”, and the like are defined.

  Next, a deviation pattern is determined based on the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d or the fluctuation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation) 202d3 (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203j of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and fluctuations in symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the time.

  When the processing of S307 or S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1201 of the main processing (FIG. 35). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, the same process as the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) is performed for the special symbol 1. Data of the execution area in the reserved ball storage area of the special symbol 1 is acquired by the processing of S401, and then the same processing as the processing in the special symbol 2 variation start processing (S208) is performed. The specific contents are the same as the processing in the special symbol 2 variation start processing (S208), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64a. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64a (start winning prize) (S501). Here, a ball entering the first ball inlet 64a is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64a (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S503).

  If there is no winning at the first entrance 64a (S501: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4. If not less (S503: No), the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64a (S501: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S505).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S505, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are acquired, and the special The pattern 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area (S506), and the process proceeds to S507.

  In the process of S507, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 64b (S507). If it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 64b (S507: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is processed in the same manner as when the first entrance 64a is won.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S508), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) ( S509: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S510), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S511). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type counter C3 are acquired, stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area (S512), and the process proceeds to S513.

  If there is no winning at the second entrance 64b (S507: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 64b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is less than 4. If not (S509: No), the process proceeds to S513.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 29, the prefetching process of S513 is demonstrated. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process (S513). This prefetch process (S513) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 28).

  In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S601). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S601: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the change is pre-reading probability change (S602). ), If the game state is in the pre-reading probability change (S602: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first random number table 202a (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Here, the determination in the process of S603 is performed in the same manner as the process of S303 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 26).

  On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the gaming state is not in the pre-reading probability change (S602: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the low probability of the first random number table 202a (S604), Move on to processing. Here, the determination in the process of S604 is performed in the same manner as the process of S304 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 26).

  Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result determined in S603 or S604 is set (S605). The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts a lottery result from the winning information command, and stores this information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a for use in navigation processing or the like. .

  After the winning information command is set by the processing of S605, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination result determined in S603 or S604 is a probability variation jackpot of the special symbol (S606). Here, whether or not it is a probable big hit is determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the processing of S506 or S512 of the start winning process (FIG. 28). Specifically, the jackpot type selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2 is the jackpot A1 selected when passing through the first gate 650a, or the jackpot B1 or jackpot C1 selected when passing through the second gate 650b. If it is either of these, it will be a promising jackpot. The jackpot type and the value of the first type counter C2 are defined by the first hit type selection table 202b. The jackpot A1 selected when passing through the first gate 650a is set to "0 to 0". 49 ”(FIG. 15A), the big hit B1 or big hit C1 selected when passing through the second gate 650b is selected when the first hit type counter C2 is“ 0 to 49 ”( Accordingly, when the value of the first hit type counter C <b> 2 is “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a probable big hit.

  When it is determined by the process of S606 that the probability change is a big hit (S606: Yes), the pre-reading probability changing flag 203i is set to ON (1) (S607), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined by the processing of S606 that the probability variation is not a big hit (S606: No), it is determined whether or not the time is a big win (S608). In the present embodiment, since all jackpots that are not probable jackpots are time bonuses, it can be determined that the jackpot is a jackpot if the lottery result is a jackpot and not a promising jackpot.

  If it is determined in the processing of S608 that the time has been saved (S608: Yes), the prefetching probability changing flag 203i is set to off (S609). On the other hand, when the lottery result is out of the special symbol (S608: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64a. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64a is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S701: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the hold first area → execution area, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h of the RAM 203 is greater than 0 (S708). The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol hour / hour state. If the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S708: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is normal. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S708: No), it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S709). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first inlet 64a is released. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64a as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64a, the first winning opening 65a is limited even if the first winning opening 64a is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64a during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the entrance 64a. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64a becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second per-random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 16A).

  In the process of S708, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the processing of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 is low. Based on the second per random number table for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 16A).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S710 or S711 is a normal symbol win (S712), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S712: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S713). In the processing of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714), and when it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714: Yes), the current present is the special symbol. It is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S715). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64a as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where it is out of the normal symbol In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S715, if the special symbol is not big hit (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64a is set to 1 second, the number of opening times is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S714, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64a is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S712, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S712: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S718). In the processing of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719), and if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case of low probability of normal symbols, Since the release period of the first entrance 64a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64a.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set in advance by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S722 (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1207) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S713 or S718.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol win when the second symbol display device 83 starts the variation display being executed. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64a is set (S725), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S725, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1205) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S803: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, a sensor detection process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the sensor detection process (S109). This sensor detection process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) and is set in the switch reading process (S101) executed in the timer interrupt process. This is a process for transmitting a winning ball detection command or an out ball detection command to the sound lamp control device 113 based on the information in the storage area 203m based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the out port.

  In the sensor detection process, first, it is determined whether there is information in the winning detection information storage area 203m (S901). If it is determined that there is no winning detection information (S901: No), the process proceeds to S904. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is winning detection information (S901: Yes), the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls are calculated based on the information in the winning detection information storage area 203m (S902). Here, the number of acquired balls is determined by the winning opening, and the relationship between the winning opening and the acquired number of balls is defined in advance.

  Next, a winning ball detection command is set based on the calculated number of winning balls and the number of winning balls (S903). The winning ball detection command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning ball detection command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls from the winning ball detection command, and stores the extracted values in the game information totaling area 223i of the RAM 223.

  When the process of S901 or S903 ends, it is determined whether there is information that the game ball has passed through the outlet (S904). If there is information that the game ball has passed through the out mouth (S904: Yes), an out ball detection command is set (S905). The winning ball detection command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the out-ball detection command, the sound lamp control device 113 adds 1 to the value of the total driving ball counter 223 i 1 in the game information totaling area 223 i of the RAM 223. On the other hand, when the game ball has not passed through the outlet (S904: No), the process of S905 is skipped and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1001), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1101). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104). If it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105), and if not stored (S1105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S1112 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process moves to S1112 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1214 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1112, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1112). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1113, S1114) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1113, S1114) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1113), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1114). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1105: Yes), and if the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1110, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1111), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1201 to S1207 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1210 and S1211 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1201). Specifically, the presence / absence of information in the winning detection information storage area 203m detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 is determined. A prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls is transmitted. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) or the start winning process (see FIG. 28) or the winning information command set in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 29). Send to. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the jackpot start command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) and the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1203). A jackpot type determination process for selecting a jackpot type based on the game ball passing through the gate 650b is executed (S1204). Details of the processing of S1204 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the case of a special symbol jackpot state, a jackpot effect is executed and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1205). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific winning opening 65a in the final round, the end of the jackpot is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1205) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the processing of S1205 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 64b is executed (S1206). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1207). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 27) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 26), a variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed. The first symbol display device 37 starts. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on. If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 26) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 27) is completed, The variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1207). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30) or the process of S721, the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 30), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S713 or S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30). (Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 receives the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1209). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1209: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the processes after S1201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1209: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, until the next main process execution timing is reached. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1210, S1211).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1210). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1202 (S1211).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1208, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 33 has been executed, the power-off process after S1212 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1212), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1213). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1214), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1215), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1208 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1201 to S1207 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1210 and S1211 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1201. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process at power-off, and the stack pointer is not changed in the initial setting process (S1101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1201. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main controller 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot type determination process (S1204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the jackpot type determination process (S1204). This jackpot type determination process (FIG. 36, S1204) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 35), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state of a special symbol, the first gate 650a or This is a process for selecting a jackpot type based on the passing of the game ball through the second gate 650b.

  In the jackpot type determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is on (S1301). Here, the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON when the variation display variation time in which the lottery result is a jackpot has elapsed (that is, when the variation display stops) (see S218 in FIG. 25). That is, it is shown that the player is given the right to be able to start the big hit game when the big hit flag 203k is set to ON. In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 25, S104), when the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON (see S218 in FIG. 25), a jackpot command is set (see S219 in FIG. 25), and then the sound lamp control device 113 is set. When the jackpot command is transmitted to the player, a display (FIG. 7B or FIG. 8) prompting the player to pass the game ball to either the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b is displayed. . Thereafter, a jackpot type selection is executed for either the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b based on the gate through which the game ball first passes.

  When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not on (S1301: No), since the jackpot has not occurred, the processing is terminated as it is, and the processing returns to the main processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the first gate 650a (S1302). In the present embodiment, detection of whether or not the game ball has passed through the first gate 650a is performed in the switch reading process (see S101 in FIG. 24) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and in the process of S1302. The presence or absence of detection in the switch reading process is determined. Although not shown, a flag corresponding to each switch is set in the RAM 203, and a corresponding flag is detected for a winning opening in which the passing of a game ball is detected by the switch reading process (S101 in FIG. 24). Set to on. The flags are all set to OFF based on the execution of the switch reading process at the next interrupt, and are set to ON based on the newly read information. . Note that it may be configured to detect whether or not a game ball has passed through the first gate in the process of S1302.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1302 that the game ball has passed through the first gate 650a (S1302: Yes), the jackpot flag 203k is set to off (S1303) and is set as the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. The jackpot type is selected from the first gate selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 15A) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 (S1304). Next, the jackpot start is set (S1305), the jackpot start command is set (S1306), and this process ends. Here, by setting the jackpot flag 203k to off based on the passage of the first gate 650a, the jackpot is based on the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b through which the game ball first passes after the jackpot The type can be determined. The jackpot start command set in the process of S1306 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, it transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114 (see S2006 in FIG. 43), and calculates and stores a difference ball at the time of the jackpot start (FIG. 43). 43 S2005). As will be described in detail later, the number of game balls actually acquired by the player in the jackpot game is calculated by comparing the difference ball at the start of the jackpot with the difference ball at the end of the jackpot. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1302 that the game ball has not passed through the first gate 650a (S1302: No), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the second gate 650b (S1307). . If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second gate 650b (S1307: Yes), the processing from S1308 to S1311 is executed. The processing from S1308 to S1311 differs from the processing from S1303 to S1306 described above in that the jackpot type is determined using the second gate selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 15B), and the other processing is the same. Since it is a process, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When it is determined in the process of S1302 that the game ball has not passed through the first gate 650a (S1302: No), and in the process of S1307, it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the second gate 650b (S1307). : No), this process is terminated as it is. Here, the jackpot flag 203k is turned off only when the game ball passes through the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b. Therefore, after the jackpot occurs, the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b is turned off. Until the game ball passes, the passage of the game ball of the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b can be repeatedly determined (S1302 or S1307) in the main process (FIG. 35). In the present embodiment, the passage of the game ball of the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b is determined in the main process, but it may be determined in the timer interruption process.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1205) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1205). This jackpot control process (S1205) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific winning prize ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k of the special symbol is on (S1401). In the process of S1401, if the special symbol jackpot medium or jackpot flag 203k is off (S1401: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if the special symbol jackpot medium or jackpot flag 203k is on (S1401: Yes), the gate control process is executed (S1402).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the gate control process (S1402) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this gate control processing (S1402). This gate control process (S1402) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, the game ball is moved to the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b. This is a process for switching the position of the sorting member 900 for sorting.

  In the gate control process, first, 1 is added to the gate time counter 203n (S1501). Next, it is determined whether or not the gate time counter 203n is greater than 1250 (S1502). If it is determined that the gate time counter 203n is greater than 1250 (S1503), the position of the sorting member 900 is switched (S1503), and the gate time counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S1504).

  Here, since the gate control process is repeatedly executed every 4 ms in the main process, the position of the sorting member can be switched every time the gate time counter 203n reaches 1250 (that is, 5s). In addition, the position of the sorting member 900 is either a position where the game ball passes to the first gate 650a (FIG. 3A) or a position where the game ball passes to the second gate 650b (FIG. 3B). It can be switched to become.

  In this embodiment, the determination value of the gate time counter 203n is 1250 (a value that becomes 5 s), but may be a smaller value or a larger value.

  Here, returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. When the processing of S1402 is completed, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1403). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1403: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1404), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1405). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1403 (S1403: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1406). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1406, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1406: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1406, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is established (S1406: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1407), It is determined whether or not the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a this time is for the final round (that is, whether or not all of the jackpot rounds have ended) (S1408).

  If it is determined that the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed in the final round (S1408: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a probable big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a probable jackpot based on the first hit type counter C2 in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (203a or 203b) of the special symbol in which the jackpot game has been executed. . If it is determined that the probability variation is a big hit (S1409: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is turned on (S1410), and the processing proceeds to S1412. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation is not a big win (S1409: No), since it is a time-shortage big hit in this embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is turned off (S1411), and the processing proceeds to S1412. In the process of S1412, end of jackpot is set (S1412), then a jackpot end command is set based on the number of rounds (S1413), and this process ends. If it is determined that the round in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed is not the final round (S1408: No), the processing from S1409 to S1413 is skipped, and this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 61. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is activated when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1817 (see FIG. 41) is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1814 in FIG. 41), it executes a power-off process in S1818. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1818 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1602: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process at S1818 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1818, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1602: Yes), the current ramp-up process is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1818, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1604 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1604, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1606). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1608, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1608). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S1818 is executed (see S1816 in FIG. 41). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1818 is executed, the process of S1608 in the state in which the power-off flag 223y is turned on is the same as the current startup process. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1818 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1609), a data reading process is executed (S1610), and the power-off flag is set. 223y is set to OFF (S1611). Details of the data reading process (S1610) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1612), interrupt permission is set (S1613), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1608 is reached when the power-off flag 223y is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S1604 to S1606. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), the process from S1609 to S1610, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1612, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1612). The interrupt permission is set (S1613), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process of S1609 is that when the process from S1604 to S1606 is reached via the process of S1606, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1604. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, and thereby the sound lamp control device 113 is stored. This is because the control can be continued.

  Here, the data reading process (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the data reading process (S1610). This data reading process (S1610) is the data stored in the data storage process (S1817) executed when the occurrence of power interruption is detected in the main process (FIG. 41) of the sound lamp control device described later (this embodiment). In the form, it is processing for reading out game information and game total information input by the player.

  In the data reading process, first, current time information is acquired from the time register 263a of the RTC 260 (S1701), and is executed when the occurrence of power interruption is detected in the main process (FIG. 41) of the sound lamp control device from the other register 263b. The data stored by the data storage process (S1817) is acquired (S1702). Next, the date information of the data acquired from the other register 263b and the date information acquired from the time register are compared to determine whether the dates match (S1703). If the dates of the date information do not match (S1703: No), the power is cut off due to the closing of the store or the like, and it is determined that the player will not play the game continuously, so the game information reading process is not performed. Finally, this process ends.

  Thereby, when the store is opened next after the store is closed, it is possible to reduce the trouble of initializing the information of the other register 263b or executing the process of clearing the pachinko machine 10 to the RAM.

  On the other hand, if the dates of the date information match (S1703: Yes), the data acquired from the other register 263b is stored in each area of the game information storage area 223h and the game information totaling area 223i (S1704), and the continuation confirmation flag 223m Is set to ON (S1705). Here, when the continuation confirmation flag 223m is set to ON, a display game continuation confirmation start command is transmitted to the display control device by the navigation game processing (S1811) executed in the main processing of the sound lamp control device described later, and the navigation A screen for selecting whether or not to continue the game (FIG. 10A) is displayed.

  As a result, when the power is turned off and then turned on again after a game due to a power failure or repair of a malfunction, a screen asking whether or not to continue the navigation game is displayed. It is possible to notify the player that the game information is set without being erased. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with peace of mind even after the power is turned off. In addition, even when the player is changed while the power is turned off, it is possible to recognize that the new player is in a state where the game information is set, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  In the present embodiment, when the game information matching the current date is set after the power is turned on, after executing the process of S1704, instead of executing the process of S1705, the navigation game flag The data reading process (FIG. 40, S1610) may be terminated by setting 223j to ON. With this configuration, when the power is turned on again, if the time in the preset game information has already passed, the extension is confirmed by the navigation game end process (FIG. 57, S2605). The display mode (see FIG. 9A) can be configured to be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of continuation or the like from being displayed every time after turning on the power, and it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player feels troublesome.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous processing of S1801 was executed (S1801). If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1812 without performing the processes in S1802 to S1811. In S1801, the process of determining whether 1 msec has passed or not is mainly related to the display (effect) in S1802 to S1811, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1812 and the variation display setting process of S1813 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1812 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S1813 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1803 to S1813 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1808 described later are set (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1805 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1805, a waiting-for-customer effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on the reserved lamp is performed according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a predetermined period such as a period when the variation effect is not executed, a navigation game setting screen (see FIG. 6) is displayed by a navigation game process (S1811) described later. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation to the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1809, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S1808 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1809 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, a navigation game process is executed (S1811), and the process proceeds to S1812. In the navigation game processing, a setting screen for performing a navigation game is displayed based on the fact that the frame button has been pressed during a predetermined period such as a period in which the variation effect is not executed, and the selection switch is displayed while the setting screen is displayed. Based on the depression of 270 (a) to (d), the display on the screen is changed, and setting information for performing the navigation game can be set. Detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 to 56.

  In the process of S1812, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1812). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1813). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1813 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1814). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1814 (S1814: Yes), both the power interruption flag 223y and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1816), and data storage processing is executed (S1817). A power-off process is executed (S1818). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1819), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1815), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1815: No), the process returns to S1801, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1815: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Here, for the detailed description of each process in the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 described above, for the sake of convenience, the details of the command determination process (S1812) are described first. Each process will be described in turn.

  Next, a command determination process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1812). This command determination processing (S1812) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination processing (S1812), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1901). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on (S1902), the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S1903), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 60) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if a variation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 31) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1907). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1907: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (special The variable display hold count N1) in the symbol 1 or the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball counter 203e (the variable display hold count N2 in the special symbol 2) is extracted, and this is extracted as the special symbol 1 hold ball of the voice lamp control device 113. The number is stored in the number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (S1908), and the process returns to the main process. In the processing of S1908, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set.

  Here, since the ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64a (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected, or every time the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter of the voice lamp control device 113 by the processing of S1908. The value of 223c can be matched with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the special symbol lottery even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. To the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1908 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1607, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1907: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1909). When a winning information command is received (S1909: Yes), the lottery result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command, and the winning information storage area of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is extracted. Store in the first area of 223a (S1910), and return to the main process. In the process of S1910, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  On the other hand, if a winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1909 (S1909: No), it is then determined whether or not a command for jackpot has been received (S1911). When a command related to jackpot is received (S1912), a jackpot related process is executed (S1912), and the process returns to the main process. Details of the jackpot related processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

  In the process of S1911, when the command related to the jackpot is not received (S1911: No), it is determined whether or not a winning ball detection command is received from the main control device 110 (S1913). If a winning ball detection command is received (S1913: Yes), a winning ball determination process is executed (S1914), and the process returns to the main process. Details of the winning ball discrimination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the winning ball detection command is not received in the process of S1913 (S1913: No), it is determined whether or not the out ball detection command is received from the main controller 110 (S1915). If an out-sphere detection command is received (S1915: Yes), an out-sphere discrimination process is executed (S1916) and the process returns to the main process. Details of the out-ball discrimination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1915, when the out ball detection command is not received (S1915: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1917). ), The process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46, the jackpot related process (S1912), which is one process in the command determination process (FIG. 42, S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related processing (S1912). This jackpot related process (S1912) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, determines the command related to the jackpot received from the main control device 110, and the command The process according to is executed.

  In the jackpot related process (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot command is received from the main controller 110 (S2001). When the jackpot command is received (S2001: Yes), the display jackpot command is set (S2002), the navigation process is executed (S2003), and the process returns to the command determination process. The display jackpot command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and display control is performed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Sent to device 114. When receiving the display jackpot command, the display control device 114 displays a display (FIG. 7A) suggesting the occurrence of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the navigation process (S2003) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the navigation process (S2003). This navigation process (S2003) is executed in the jackpot related process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the game information storage area 223h, the game information totaling area 223i, and the current time storage. A display navigation type command is set based on each information of the area 223q.

  Specifically, in the navigation process (FIG. 44, S2003), first, in the game information storage area 223h, the game end time that is the data of the game time storage area 223h1 and the target difference that is the data of the target difference ball storage area 223h2. The number of balls is acquired (S2101). Next, the value (P1) of the total driving ball counter 223i1 in the game information totaling area 223i, the value (P2) of the total acquired ball counter 223i2, and the 1R difference ball number which is data of the 1R difference ball storage area 223i4 are acquired. (S2102). After the processing in S2102, the current time, which is data in the current time storage area 223q, is acquired (S2103).

  After the processing from S2101 to S2103, the number of remaining target rounds is calculated by dividing the above-mentioned target number of balls by subtracting the current number of balls (P2-P1) by the number of 1R balls (S2104). ), It is determined whether or not the game time is at the end (S2105). Here, whether or not the game time is in the final stage is determined by comparing the game end time acquired in the process of S2101 with the current time acquired in the process of S2103, and the remaining time from the current time to the game end time. The determination is made based on whether or not the time is within a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 minutes).

  If it is determined in S2105 that the game time is not the final stage (S2105: No), the navigation type is selected based on the remaining target round number calculated in S2104 and the navigation selection table 222a (S2106). ), A navigation type command is set based on the selected navigation type (S2107), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the start of the big hit (right of the big hit game is granted) is determined, the target difference ball set by the player and the 1R difference ball number in the previous jackpot game are determined. Since the number of current rounds required to achieve the target is calculated, and the remaining number of rounds is used to navigate whether the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b should be aimed, so that more players The player can easily make a selection according to the goal.

  Also, since the gate to navigate is selected based on the game time set by the player (remaining time until the game end time), it is easy to achieve the target with the remaining game time. it can. Furthermore, since the predicted difference ball at the end of the game is displayed when the remaining game time decreases, it is possible to reduce the burden of the player playing the game while calculating the difference ball at the end.

  In the present embodiment, the remaining target round number is calculated based on the average 1R difference ball number in the previous jackpot in the processing of S2102, but not limited to this, the average of a plurality of times (for example, ten times or jackpot from power-on) It may be 1R difference ball number. Further, the number of remaining target rounds may be calculated not only from the number of difference balls but also from the time required to execute the jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the remaining game time is equal to or less than the predetermined time, the number of predicted difference balls at the end time is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Good. The predicted difference ball number may always display the difference ball number when each jackpot type is currently executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while considering a gate to be aimed next during a normal game. Furthermore, review of the goal setting can be considered, and a game that matches the player's situation can be provided.

  Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. In the process of S2001, if the jackpot command has not been received (S2001: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S2004). If a jackpot start command has been received (S2004: Yes), a start difference calculation process is executed (S2005), a display jackpot start command is set (S2006), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In order to calculate the 1R difference ball number, which is the difference between the number of balls hit by the player per 1R of the jackpot game and the number acquired by the player, by the start difference ball calculation process (S2005) executed here. The difference ball number at the start of the jackpot is calculated. Details of the start difference ball calculation process (S2005) will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, a display (not shown) that suggests the start of a jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by a display jackpot start command that is set next to the start difference ball calculation process.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 45, the start difference ball calculation process (S2005) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the start difference ball calculation process (S2005). This start difference ball calculation process (S2005) is executed in the jackpot related process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the player has driven in per 1R of the above jackpot game. This is a process for calculating the number of balls at the start of the jackpot game in order to calculate the number of 1R difference balls, which is the difference between the number of balls and the number acquired by the player.

  In the start difference ball calculation process, the value (P1) of the total driving ball counter 223i1 and the value 223i2 (P2) of the total acquired ball counter 223i1 in the game information totaling area 223i are acquired (S2201), and the total number of acquired balls A value obtained by subtracting the value (P1) of the total pitched ball counter 223i1 from the value (P2) of the counter 223i2 is stored in the start difference ball storage area 223i3 as the difference ball number at the time of starting the big hit game, and this processing is finished. .

  As described above, by calculating and storing the difference ball at the start time of the jackpot, it is possible to calculate an accurate difference ball based on the game ball acquired by the jackpot game. Therefore, accurate navigation can be performed by the player.

  Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2004 that a jackpot start command has not been received (S2004: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2007). If received (S2007: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S2008), a display round number command is set according to the extracted round number (S2009), and this process is performed. finish. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1616 (S2007: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot end command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2010). When a jackpot end command is received (S2010: Yes), 1R difference ball calculation processing is performed (S2011), a display jackpot end command is set (S2009), and this processing ends. The display jackpot end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot end command, the display control device 114 displays a display (not shown) indicating the end of the jackpot game on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot end command has not been received in the processing of S2010 (S2010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed ( S2013), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the winning ball determination process (S1914) executed in the command determination process (FIG. 42) described above will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the winning ball discrimination process (S1914). This winning ball determination process (S1914) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and based on the received command, data in the game information totaling area 223i. Is a process for updating.

  Specifically, in the winning ball discriminating process, the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls are extracted from the received command (S2401), and the number of winning balls is added to the total driving ball counter 223i1 of the game information totaling area 223i. Then, the number of acquired balls is added to the total acquired ball number counter 223i2 (S2402), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, by updating the total hit ball number counter 223i1 and the total acquired ball number counter 223i2, it is possible to calculate an accurate difference ball number at the present time. If the current difference ball number is configured to be displayed, the difference ball number is displayed based on the information updated in the winning ball determination process (FIG. 47, S1914), so that the player It is possible to accurately compare the number of difference balls and the target.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the out-ball discrimination process (S1916) executed in the command determination process (FIG. 42) described above will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the out-ball discrimination process (S1916). In the out-ball discrimination process (S1916), the data of the game information totaling area 223i is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 and based on the received command. Is a process for updating.

  In the out-ball discrimination process (FIG. 48, S1916), first, the value of the total hit ball number counter 223i1 is read (S2501). Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the total driving ball number counter 223i1, and the total driving ball number counter 223i1 is set (S2502).

  In this way, every time a game ball enters the out port 66, the total number of hit balls counter 223i1 is incremented by 1 and updated, so that the number of game balls fired by the player can be correctly determined. . Note that the total number of hit balls 223i1 is updated by adding not only the out balls but also the number of game balls won in other winning ports.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the navigation game process (S1811) executed in the main process (see FIG. 41) described above will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this navigation game process (S1811). This navigation game process (S1811) is performed during the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the display related to the navigation game is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (from FIG. 6). This is a process for displaying FIG.

  In the navigation game process (FIG. 49, S1811), first, date and time information is acquired from the time register 263a of the RTC 260 and stored in the current time storage area 223q (S2601). Here, since the navigation game process is executed every 1 ms in the main process of the voice lamp control process, the date and time information in the current time storage area 223q can be updated every 1 ms. In the present embodiment, the information in the current time storage area 223q is updated in the main process. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the RTC 260 is provided in the main controller 113, and the main controller 113 The time information may be received as a command and updated.

  Next, it is determined whether it is a navigation game setting possible period (S2602). If it is determined that it is the navigation game setting possible period (S2602: Yes), the navigation game setting process is executed (S2603), and the process proceeds to S2604. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the navigation game setting possible period (S2602: No), the process of S2603 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2604. Here, the determination as to whether or not it is the navigation game setting period is performed as to whether or not an effect that requires pressing of the frame button 22 is not performed. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is pressed, a period during which the variation pattern in which the production or the like is varied is not executed. With this configuration, the player can set the navigation game at a desired timing as appropriate, which is convenient. Although illustration is omitted, a flag indicating that it is a navigation game setting possible period is set, and if the flag is on, the process of S2602 is determined as Yes. Further, it is easier to turn off this flag based on the fact that the effect of pressing the frame button 22 is set, and execute the process of turning it on again based on the completion of the effect. In addition, it is possible to execute a process for determining whether or not it is a settable period of the navigation game.

  In the present embodiment, the setting of the navigation game is a period in which the effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame button 22 is pressed long (for example, for 3 seconds). Thus, the navigation setting may be configured. Moreover, it is good also as a within period only when the demonstration screen is displayed or when the special symbol variation display is executed. In addition, when the setting of the navigation game is being executed, it is possible to perform the game more stably by prohibiting or invalidating the setting using the frame button 22.

  Here, the navigation game setting process (S2603) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the navigation game setting process (S2603). This navigation game setting process (S2603) displays a display (FIG. 6) for setting game information relating to the navigation game on the third symbol display device 81, and the operated selection switch (upper switch 270a, right switch 270b, This is a process for setting game information based on the lower switch 270c and the left switch 270d).

  In the navigation game setting process (FIG. 49, S1811), first, it is determined whether or not the game information input flag 223f is on (S2701). If it is determined that the game information input flag 223f is on (S2701: Yes), a switch determination process is executed (S2702), and this process ends. Details of the switch determination processing (S2702) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game information input flag 223f is not on (S2701: No), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2703). If it is determined in step S2703 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed, this processing ends. Here, the determination regarding the pressing of the frame button 22 is to determine whether or not the pressing of the frame button is detected in the processing of S1807 of the main processing (see FIG. 41). Therefore, in the process of S2703, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected, after the process in the main process is executed, it is repeatedly executed to determine again the pressing of the frame button 22 in the process of S2703. be able to. In this embodiment, the process returns to the main process when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the process of S2703. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process waits until the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. It may be. Thus, the main process is not executed until the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, and the process at the time of detecting the pressing of the frame button 22 and the main process can be synchronized.

  If it is determined in step S2703 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2703: Yes), the game information input flag 223f is set on and the button effect prohibition flag 223g is set on (S2704). Next, a display game information input start command is set based on the current time information in the current time storage area 223q (S2705), and this process ends. The process of S2705 is a process for setting the current time at the game end time when the game information input screen is displayed, whereby the game end time is input after the current time. Therefore, the number of operations for the player to input the game end time can be reduced as compared to when the setting start is 0:00. In the process of S2705, the time 1 input area 223r1 and the time 2 input area 223r2 of the input area 223r are updated based on the current time information so that the current time is input at the game end time. The display game information input start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 (S1802). The information is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display game information input start command, the display control device 114 displays a screen (FIG. 6) on which game information can be input on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the switch determination process (S2702) for performing the process based on the switch operation corresponding to the screen on which the game information can be input can be executed by the game information input flag 223f set to ON. Further, the button effect prohibition flag 223g that is set to ON here prevents other effects requiring button operation from being displayed while the screen on which game information can be input is displayed. It is possible to prevent an effect or the like necessary for the button operation from being displayed, and to prevent confusion of the player.

  Here, the details of the switch determination processing (S2702) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this switch discrimination processing (S2702). This switch discrimination process (S2702) is a process for performing a process based on the operation of the switch when the third symbol display device 81 displays a screen (FIG. 6) on which game information can be input.

  In the switch determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper switch 270a is pressed (S2801). If it is determined that the upper switch 270a has been pressed (S2801: Yes), the upper switch process is executed (S2802), and the process proceeds to S2803. On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper switch 270a has not been pressed (S2801: No), the process of S2802 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2803. Here, the determination as to whether or not the upper switch 270a has been pressed is performed in the same manner as the determination (S2703) as to whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed in the above-described navigation game setting process (see FIG. 50).

  Here, the details of the upper switch process (S2802) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the upper switch process (S2802). This upper switch process (S2802) is to perform a process based on the depression of the upper switch 270a when a screen (FIG. 6) on which game information can be input is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is processing of.

  In the upper switch process, first, data of the cursor position storage area 223p is acquired (S2901), and it is determined whether or not the acquired data of the cursor position storage area 223p is time 1 (S2902). If it is determined that the acquired data in the cursor position storage area 223p is time 1 (S2902: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 of the input area 223r (S2903). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 is greater than 23 (S2904). If it is determined that the value is greater than 23 (S2904: Yes), the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 is changed to 0. (S2905), the process proceeds to S2918. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2904 that the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 is not greater than 23 (S2904: No), the process of S2905 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2918.

  Here, the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 set in the processing from S2903 to S2905 is for setting the time of the game end time on the game information input screen (FIG. 6). Therefore, by the processes of S2904 and S2905, the settable time can be set from 0 to 23:00 and no other values can be set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2902 that the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is not time 1 (S2902: No), it is determined whether or not the cursor position is time 2 (S2906). If it is determined that it is time 2 (S2906: Yes), the same processing as the processing from S2903 to S2905 described above is performed for the time 2 input region 223r2 of the input region 223r. The processing from S2903 to S2905 is different from the processing from S2907 to S2908 in the portion that determines whether or not the determination of the upper limit value is greater than 5 in the processing of S2908, and the others are the same, so detailed description thereof is omitted. To do. In the process of S2908, it is determined whether or not the upper limit value is greater than 5. The time 2 input area 223r2 sets the tens place of the game end time on the game information input screen (FIG. 6). This is because the settable minutes are only 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, or 50 minutes. Here, in the present embodiment, the amount that can be set is only one of the above-mentioned values, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the settable value may be reduced to only one of 0 and 30 minutes. The settable value may be increased so that it can be set in units of minutes. As a result, when the settable value is reduced, the player can select the set value, so that the setting time can be shortened because there are few choices. When the settable value is increased, the player wants to set A value closer to the game end time can be set.

  Next, in the processing of S2906, when it is determined that the cursor position is not time 2 (S2906: No), it is then determined whether or not the cursor position is difference ball 1 (S2910), and the cursor position is different. When it is determined that the ball is the ball 1 (S2910: Yes), the same processing as the processing from S2903 to S2905 described above is performed on the difference ball 1 input region 223r3 of the input region 223r. The processing from S2903 to S2905 and the processing from S2911 to S2913 are different in the portion for determining whether or not the determination of the upper limit value is larger than 99 in the processing of S2912, and the others are the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. To do.

  Here, the value of the difference ball 1 input area 223r3 set in the processing from S2910 to S2913 is for setting the value of the target difference ball of 1000 balls on the game information input screen (FIG. 6). Therefore, by the processing of S2912 and S2913, the 1000 position of the target difference ball can be set from 0 to 99 (that is, the 10000 position can also be set).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the cursor position is not the difference ball 1 (S2910: No), it is then determined whether the cursor position is the difference ball 2 (S2914), and the cursor position is the difference ball 2 When it is determined (S2914: Yes), the same processing as the processing from S2903 to S2905 described above is performed on the difference ball 2 input area 223r4 of the input area 223r. The processing from S2903 to S2905 and the processing from S2915 to S2917 are different in the portion for determining whether or not the determination of the upper limit value is larger than 9 in the processing of S2916, and the others are the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. To do.

  Here, the value of the difference ball 2 input area 223r4 set in the processing from S2915 to S2917 is for setting the value of the target difference ball in units of 100 balls on the game information input screen (FIG. 6). Therefore, the hundreds of the target difference ball can be set to a value from 0 to 9 by the processing of S2916 and S2917.

  Through the processing from S2911 to S2913 and the processing from S2915 to S2917, the target difference ball can be set from 0 to 99900 balls in units of 100 balls. In the present embodiment, the target difference ball that can be set is set to 100 balls. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the settable value may be reduced such as 1000 balls, or set so that 50 balls can be set. The possible values may be increased. As a result, when the settable value is reduced, the player can select the set value, so that the setting time can be shortened because there are few choices. When the settable value is increased, the player wants to set A value closer to the target difference ball can be set. Further, in this embodiment, the range of values that can be set for the target difference ball is 0 to 99900 balls, but is not limited to this. For example, the value range that can be set for the target difference ball is 0 to 19900 balls. The upper limit value may be reduced, or the upper limit value may be increased from 0 to 999900 in the range of values that can be set for the target difference ball. As a result, if the upper limit value that can be set is reduced, the setting time can be shortened because there are few choices when the player selects the set value, and if the upper limit value that can be set is increased, the player wants to set It is possible to set a value closer to the target difference ball considered.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2914 that the cursor position is not the difference ball 2 (S2914: No), the cursor position is one of set, reset, and return positions, and therefore, based on pressing of the upper switch 270a. Since there is no processing to be executed, this processing is terminated as it is.

  After the processing of S2904, S2905, S2908, S2909, S2912, S2913, S2916 or S2917, a display input screen update command is set based on the value of the input area 223r (S2918), and this processing ends. The display input screen update command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display input screen update command, the display control device 114 updates the display of the game information input screen (FIG. 6) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received command.

  In the present embodiment, no limit is set for the player's target setting. However, a limit may be set for the difference ball that can be set for the set target time. Here, this limit is a value set in the ROM 202, which is calculated in advance from the design time required to digest the jackpot game and the average appearance on the design value.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. After the process of S2801 or S2802, it is determined whether or not the lower switch 270c is pressed (S2803). Next, if it is determined that the lower switch 270c is pressed (S2803: Yes), the lower switch process is executed (S2804), and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lower switch 270c has not been pressed (S2803: No), the process of S2804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2805. Here, the determination as to whether or not the lower switch 270c has been pressed is performed in the same manner as the determination (S2703) as to whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed in the above-described navigation game setting process (see FIG. 50).

  Here, the details of the lower switch process (S2804) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the lower switch process (S2804). This lower switch process (S2804) is performed based on the depression of the lower switch 270c when the screen (FIG. 6) on which the game information can be input is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The difference is that the addition process in the upper switch process (FIG. 52) is a subtraction process, the determination of the upper limit value is the determination of the lower limit value, and the others are the same. Therefore, only different points will be described, and description of the same points will be omitted.

  If the position of the cursor is time 1 (S3002: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 (S3003), and after the process of S3003, the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 is smaller than 0 ( (S3004: Yes), the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 is changed to 23 (S3005). If the cursor position is time 2 (S3006: Yes), the value of the time 2 input area 223r2 is decremented by 1 (S3007), and the value of the time 2 input area 223r2 is smaller than 0 after the processing of S3007. (S3009: Yes), the value of the time 2 input area 223r2 is changed to 5 (S3005). Thereby, as described above, the time or minute that can be set as the game end time can be subtracted and displayed based on the depression of the lower switch 270c, and the lower switch 270c is depressed even though the display is the lower limit value. In such a case, it can be updated to the upper limit value by the lower limit determination in S3004 or S3008.

  Next, if the cursor position is the difference ball 1 (S3010: Yes), the value of the difference ball 1 input area 223r3 is decremented by 1 (S3011). If it is smaller (S3012: Yes), the value of the difference ball 1 input area 223r3 is changed to 99 (S3013). If the cursor position is the difference ball 2 (S3014: Yes), the value of the difference ball 2 input area 223r4 is decremented by 1 (S3011). After the process of S3011, the value of the difference ball 2 input area 223r4 is set to 9. (S3017). As a result, as described above, the number of balls that can be set as the target difference ball can be subtracted and displayed based on the depression of the lower switch 270c, and the lower switch 270c is depressed even though the display is the lower limit value. In such a case, it can be updated to the upper limit value by the lower limit determination in S3012 or S3016.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. After the processing of S2803 or S2804, it is determined whether or not the right switch 270b has been pressed (S2805). Next, when it is determined that the right switch 270b has been pressed (S2805: Yes), right switch processing is executed (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2807. On the other hand, if it is determined that the right switch 270b has not been pressed (S2805: No), the process of S2806 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2807. Here, the determination as to whether or not the right switch 270c has been pressed is performed in the same manner as the determination (S2703) as to whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed in the above-described navigation game setting process (see FIG. 50).

  Here, the details of the right switch process (S2806) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the right switch process (S2806). This right switch process (S2806) is performed when the screen (FIG. 6) on which the game information can be input is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, based on the right switch 270b being pressed. It is processing of.

  In the right switch process, first, information of the cursor position storage area 223p is acquired (S3101), and it is determined whether or not the cursor position is time (S3102). Next, when it is determined that the cursor position is time (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the cursor position is time 1 (S3103). If it is determined that the cursor position is time 1 (S3103: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to time 2 (S3104), and the process proceeds to S3115. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cursor position is not at time 1 (S3103: No), the cursor position is at time 2, so the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to difference 1 (S3105), and the process of S3115 Migrate to

  If it is determined in step S3102 that the cursor position is not the time (S3102: No), it is then determined whether the cursor position is a difference ball (S3106). When it is determined that the cursor position is the difference ball (S3106: Yes), it is determined whether or not the cursor position is the difference ball 1 (S3107). If it is determined that the cursor position is the difference ball 1 (S3107: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to the difference ball 2 (S3108), and the process proceeds to S3115. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cursor position is not the difference ball 1 (S3107: No), since the cursor position is the difference ball 2, the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to the setting (S3109), and the process of S3115 Migrate to

  In the process of S3106, when it is determined that the cursor position is not a difference ball (S3106: No), it is then determined whether or not the cursor position is set (S3110). If it is determined that the cursor position is set (S3110: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to reset (S3111), and the process proceeds to S3115.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the cursor position is not set (S3110: No), it is then determined whether or not the cursor position is reset (S3112). If it is determined that the cursor position is reset (S3112: Yes), it is determined whether or not the cursor position is reset (S3112). If it is determined that the cursor position is reset (S3112: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to return (S3113), and the process proceeds to S3115. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cursor position is not reset (S3112: No), the cursor position returns, so the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to time 1 (S3114), and the process proceeds to S3115. .

  After the processing of S3104, S3105, S3108, S3109, S3111, S3113 or S3114, a display input screen update command is set based on the value of the input area 223r (S3115), and this processing ends. The display input screen update command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display input screen update command, the display control device 114 updates the display of the game information input screen (FIG. 6) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received command. Thereby, on the game information input screen, the position of the cursor can be changed and displayed based on the pressing of the right switch 270b.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. After the processing of S2805 or S2806, it is determined whether or not the left switch 270d has been pressed. Next, when it is determined that the left switch 270d has been pressed (S2808: Yes), the left switch process is executed (S2808), and the process proceeds to S2809. On the other hand, if it is determined that the left switch 270d has not been pressed (S2807: No), the process of S2808 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2809. Here, the determination of whether or not the left switch 270d has been pressed is performed in the same manner as the determination of whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed in the above-described navigation game setting process (see FIG. 50) (S2703).

  Here, the details of the left switch process (S2808) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the left switch process (S2808). This left switch process (S2808) is performed based on the left switch 270d being pressed when the screen (FIG. 6) on which the game information can be input is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This processing is different from the right switch processing (FIG. 54) in that the setting value in the cursor position storage area 223p is different, and the others are the same. Therefore, only different points will be described, and descriptions of other same points will be omitted.

  In the left switch process, when the left switch 270d is pressed and the cursor position is at time 1 (S3203: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to return (S3204), and the cursor position is at time 2. If so (S3203: No), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to time 1 (S3205), and if the cursor position is the difference 1 (S3207: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to the time. 2 (S3208), if the cursor position is the difference ball 2 (S3207: No), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to the difference ball 1 (S3209), and if the cursor position is set (S3210) : Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to time 2 (S3211), the cursor If the position is reset (S3212: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to the setting (S3213). If the cursor position returns (S3212: No), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is reset. (S3214).

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. When the processing of S2807 or S2808 is completed, it is determined whether or not the frame button has been pressed (S2809). If it is determined that the frame button has been pressed (S2809: Yes), the frame button process is executed (S2810), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button has not been pressed (S2809: No), the process of S2810 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Here, the details of the frame button process (S2810) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this frame button processing (S2810). The frame button process (S2810) is performed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 when a screen (FIG. 6) on which game information can be input is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is processing of.

  In the frame button process, first, data of the cursor position storage area 223p is acquired (S3301), and it is determined whether or not the cursor position is set in the acquired data (S3302). If it is determined that the cursor position is set (S3302: Yes), then data in the current time storage area 223q and data in the input area 223r are acquired (S3303), and the game time is later than the current time. It is determined whether or not (S3304). In the process of S3304, when it is determined that the game end time based on the time 1 input area 223r1 and the time 2 input area 223r2 of the input area 223r is not later than the current time which is data in the current time storage area 223q (S3304: No), since the game end time has passed, a display game information input error command is set (S3309), and this process ends. The display game information input error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display game information input error command, the display control device 114 displays a game information input error screen (not shown) that indicates that the game information input in the third symbol display device 81 is an error. . Thereby, the player can recognize that the input game end time is an error. In this embodiment, an error occurs when the game end time is not later than the current time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a time before the current time may not be selected.

  On the other hand, if the game end time in the input area 223r is later than the current time in the current time storage area 223q in the process of S3304 (S3304: Yes), all information in the game information total area 223i is initialized (S3305). ), Game end time data based on the time 1 input area 223r1 and the time 2 input area 223r2 of the input area 223r are stored in the game time storage area 223h1 of the game information storage area 223h, and the difference 1 input area of the input area 223r The target difference ball data based on 223r3 and the difference ball 2 input area 223r4 is stored in the target difference ball storage area 223h2 of the game information storage area 223h, and the input area 223r is initialized (S3306). In the present embodiment, in the process of S3305, all the information of the game information totaling area 223i is initialized, but not limited to this, only the information of the 1R difference ball storage area 223i4 may not be initialized, It may be initialized to a predetermined value. As a result, even when a big hit is made for the first time after the start of the navigation game, the 1R difference ball can be acquired, so that the final difference ball at the end of the game can be calculated. In the present embodiment, the game end time is input and stored in the process of S3306. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a game time (for example, 2 hours) from the current time is used. You may enter and store.

  Next, the navigation game flag 223j is set to ON (S3307), a display game information input completion command is set (S3308), and the process proceeds to S3318. The display game information input completion command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display game information input completion command, the display control device 114 changes the game information input screen (FIG. 6) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the original screen (such as a demo screen). Thereby, after inputting game information, it can be in the state which can start or continue a game. In addition, you may make it display the display which confirms the input game information on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3302 that the cursor position is not set (S3310), it is then determined whether the cursor position is reset (S3310), and the cursor position is determined to be reset. (S3310: Yes), it is determined whether or not the navigation game flag 223j is on (S3311). If it is determined that the navigation game flag 223j is not on (S3311: No), the navigation game is not executed and there is no information to be reset, and thus the process directly proceeds to S3318. On the other hand, if it is determined that the navigation game flag 223j is on (S3311: Yes), the game information storage area 223h and the input area 223r are initialized to reset the navigation game being executed (S3312), The navigation game flag 223j is set to off (S3313). After the process of S3313, a display game information reset command is set (S3314), and the process proceeds to S3318. The display game information reset command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. And transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display game information reset command, the display control device 114 changes the game information input screen (FIG. 6) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the original screen (such as a demo screen). Thereby, after resetting game information, it can be in the state which can start or continue a game.

  In the process of S3310, when it is determined that the cursor position is not reset (S3310: No), it is determined whether or not the cursor position is returned (S3315). If it is determined that the cursor position is returned (S3315: Yes), the input area 223r is initialized (S3316), and a display game information input stop command is set to erase the display of the game information input screen. (S3317), the process proceeds to S3318. The display game information stop command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display game information stop command, the display control device 114 changes the game information input screen (FIG. 6) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the original screen (such as a demo screen). Thereby, after resetting game information, it can be in the state which can start or continue a game. In addition, you may make it display on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 the confirmation which cancels the input of game information.

  On the other hand, if the cursor position does not return in the process of S3315 (S3315: No), this process is terminated as it is because there is no process based on the frame button being pressed. Note that a display suggesting that there is no processing based on pressing of the frame button may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  After the processing of S3308, S3314 or S3317, the game information input flag 223f and the button effect prohibition flag 223g are set to OFF (S3318). Thereby, the switch discriminating process (S2702) for performing the process based on the switch operation in the navigation game setting process (FIG. 50) can be prevented from being executed when the game information input screen is not displayed. In addition, other effects requiring button operation are displayed by the button effect prohibition flag 223g set to OFF here.

  Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. After the process of S2602 or S2603, it is determined based on the navigation game flag 223j whether or not a navigation game is being performed (S2604). When it is determined that the navigation game is not being performed (the navigation game flag 223j is OFF) (S2604: No), the process proceeds to S2606, and the navigation game is being determined (the navigation game flag 223j is ON). (S2604: Yes), a navigation game end process is executed (S2605), and the process proceeds to S2606.

  Here, the details of the navigation game end process (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the navigation game end process (S2605). This navigation game end process (S2605) determines whether the current time is the game end time during execution of the navigation game, and ends the navigation game when it is determined that the current time is the game end time. It is processing of.

  In the navigation game end process, first, data in the current time storage area 223q and data in the game information storage area 223h are acquired (S3401). Next, it is determined whether or not the extension confirmation flag 223k is on (S3402). If it is determined that the extension confirmation flag 223k is on (S3402: Yes), an extension confirmation process is executed (S3403). This process ends. Here, as will be described later, the extension confirmation flag 223k is turned on when the current time has passed the game end time. Therefore, when the current time has passed the game end time, the extension confirmation process (S3403). ) Is executed. This extension confirmation process (S3403) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3402 that the extension confirmation flag 223k is not on (S3402: No), the game end is the current time that is the data in the current time storage area 223q is the data in the game time storage area 223h1. It is determined whether the time has passed (S3404). If it is determined that the current time has not passed the game end time (S3404: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the current time has passed the game end time ( S3404: Yes), the extension confirmation flag 223k and the button effect prohibition flag 223g are set to ON (S3405), and the display game extension confirmation command is set based on the data in the current time storage area 223q and the game information totaling area 223i. (S3406), and this process is terminated. The display game extension confirmation command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. And transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display game extension confirmation command, the third symbol display device 81 displays a display (FIG. 9A) for selecting whether or not to extend the navigation game. This notifies the player that the game end time has arrived, and allows the player to select whether to continue the game by extending the game end time or to end the game as it is. In the present embodiment, when the game end time has elapsed, a display for selecting whether or not to extend the navigation game is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when the game end time has elapsed. Alternatively, the game result may be automatically displayed to end the navigation game so that the operation burden on the player can be reduced. In addition, when the game end time is reached during the jackpot, a display for selecting whether or not to extend until the jackpot game ends may not be displayed, and the game end time is automatically extended (for example, 30 minutes). As a result, it is considered that there are few players that will end the game during the jackpot, which is an advantageous state for the player, so by automatically extending the game end time, the operation burden on the player can be reduced and the jackpot It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by displaying an unnecessary display during the game.

  Here, the details of the extension confirmation process (S3403) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the extension confirmation processing (S2605). This extension confirmation process (S2605) is a process for confirming the extension of the game when the current time has passed the game end time while the navigation game is being executed.

  In the extension confirmation process, first, data of the cursor position storage area 223p is acquired (S3501). Next, it is determined whether or not the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is pressed (S3502). If it is determined that the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is pressed (S3502: Yes), the cursor acquired in the processing of S3501. It is determined whether or not the data in the position storage area 223p is extended (S3503). If it is determined that the cursor position is extended (S3503: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed not to be extended (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3506. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cursor position does not extend (S3503: No), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to extend (S3505), and the process proceeds to S3506. In the process of S3506, a display input screen update command is set based on the data in the cursor position storage area 223p (S3506), and then this process ends. The display input screen update command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display input screen update command, the display control device 114 does not extend or extend in the display (FIG. 9A) for selecting whether or not to extend the navigation game on the third symbol display device 81. The display of which is selected can be updated. Thereby, it can be clearly shown to the player which is currently selected. In the present embodiment, the command is set without being based on information on which of the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is pressed. However, the command is set based on information on which of the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is pressed. You may make it set. Accordingly, a dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display in which the cursor is shifted to the right side) displayed when the right switch 270b is pressed and a dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display that is displayed when the left switch 270d is pressed) Dynamic display such as the cursor moving to the left).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3502 that the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d has not been pressed (S3502: No), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S3507). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S3507: Yes), it is determined whether or not the data in the cursor position storage area 223p acquired in the processing of S3501 is extended (S3508). If it is determined that the cursor position is extended (S3508: Yes), the game information input flag 223f is set to ON (S3509), the display game information input start command is set (S3910), The process proceeds to S3514. The display game information input start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The operation when the display control device 114 receives the display game information input start command is the same as when the display game information input start command is received by the process of S2705 of the navigation game setting process (see FIG. 50). . Here, by setting the game information input flag 223f to ON and setting a display game information input start command, it is possible to set an extension of the game end time using the game information input screen. Accordingly, the extension of the game end time can be set without separately preparing a display for extending the game end time. It should be noted that a display for extending the game end time may be separately prepared and input, or instead of inputting the game end time, for example, an extended time such as 30 minutes or 1 hour can be selected. It is also possible to automatically set a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) as an extended time and to change the automatically extended time so that the player can change the setting later. Also good.

  If it is determined in step S3508 that the cursor position is not extended (S3508: No), the navigation game flag 223j and the button effect prohibition flag 223g are set to OFF (S3511), and the data in the game information storage area 223h is set. Is set, a display game result display command is set based on the data in the game information totaling area 223i (S3513), and the process proceeds to S3514. The display game result display command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display game result display command, the display (FIG. 9B) based on the data in the game information totaling area 223i is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display based on the data in the game information totaling area 223i may include a display (for example, a two-dimensional barcode) that can read the displayed information by a reading device. Thereby, a player can easily obtain game information data by a reading device such as a mobile phone.

  When the process of S3510 or S3513 is completed, the extension confirmation flag 223k is set to OFF (S3514), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3507 that the frame button has not been pressed (S3507: No), this processing ends. In this embodiment, there is no processing based on the upper switch 270a or the lower switch 270c, but the display of extending or not extending is arranged vertically so that selection can be made based on the upper switch 270a or the lower switch 270c. Anyway. The game end time may not be determined, and the game result may be displayed by the player performing an operation related to the game end when the game ends.

  Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. When the processing of S2604 or S2605 is finished, it is determined whether or not the continuation confirmation flag 223m is on (S2606). In the process of S2606, if it is determined that the continuation confirmation flag 223m is on (S2606: Yes), a display game continuation confirmation start command is set (S2607), the continuation confirmation flag 223m is set to OFF, and the continuation is continued. The checking flag 223n is set to ON (S2608), and the process proceeds to S2609. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2606 that the continuation confirmation flag 223m is not on (S2606: No), the processes of S2607 and S2608 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2609. Here, the continuation confirmation flag 223m matches the date of the current time with the date of the game information saved in the other register 263b of the RTC 260 in the data reading process (FIG. 40) of the sound lamp control device, and the game of the other register 263b. When information is overwritten in the game information storage area 223h, it is set to ON. Therefore, when the continuation confirmation flag 223m is on, it is possible to confirm whether or not to continue the game based on the saved game information by setting the display game continuation confirmation start command.

  The display game continuation confirmation start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display game continuation confirmation start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays a display (FIG. 10A) for selecting whether or not to continue the game. The game continuation confirmation start command is not displayed by the display game continuation confirmation start command, and the evacuation was performed based on a predetermined operation of the player (for example, pressing the setting button again on the game information input screen). The game may be continued based on the game information. Thereby, it is not necessary to display the game continuation confirmation by the display game continuation confirmation start command, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  When the processing of S2606 or S2608 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the continuation confirmation flag 223n is on (S2609). If it is determined that the continuation confirmation flag 223n is on (S2609: Yes), the navigation game continuation confirmation process is executed (S2610), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuation confirmation flag 223n is not on (S2609: No), the process of S2610 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Here, the details of the navigation game continuation confirmation process (S2610) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the navigation game continuation confirmation process (S2610). This navigation game continuation confirmation process (S2610) is a process for confirming whether or not to continue the game based on the acquired game information in the data reading process (FIG. 40).

  In the navigation game continuation confirmation process, first, data in the cursor position storage area 223p is acquired (S3601). Next, it is determined whether or not the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is pressed (S3602). When it is determined that the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is pressed (S3602: Yes), the same as the case where it is determined that the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is pressed in the extension confirmation process (FIG. 58) (S3502: Yes). It is. The only difference is that the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is not extended or not extended, but is continued or not continued, and the other points are the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S3602, when it is determined that the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is not pressed (S3602: No), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S3607). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S3607: Yes), it is determined whether or not the data in the cursor position storage area 223p acquired in the process of S3601 is continued (S3608). If it is determined that the cursor position does not continue (S3608: Yes), the navigation game flag 223j and the button effect prohibition flag 223g are set to off (S3609), and the game information storage area 223h and the game information total area 223i data is initialized (S3610), a display game continuation confirmation completion command is set (S3611), and the process proceeds to S3616. The display game continuation confirmation completion command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display game continuation confirmation completion command, the display control device 114 displays a display (FIG. 10 (a)) for selecting whether or not to continue the game displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the cursor position does not continue (S3608: No), the game end time in the data in the game information storage area 223h is greater than the current time in the data in the current time storage area 223q in order to continue the game. It is determined whether it is later (S3612). If it is determined that the game end time is later than the current time (S3612: Yes), the navigation game flag 223j is set to ON (S3613), and a display game information input completion command is set (S3614). , The process proceeds to S3616. The operation by the display game information input completion command set here is the same operation as the display game information input completion command set in the process of S3308 of the frame button process (FIG. 56). Note that a display for confirming game information may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by setting a display game information input completion command based on the data in the game information storage area 223h.

  In the process of S3812, when it is determined that the game end time is not later than the current time (S3612: No), a display game information input error command is set (S3615), and the process proceeds to S3616. When the process of S3611, S3614, or S3615 is completed, the continuation confirmation in progress flag 223n is set to OFF, and this process ends. Here, by setting the continuation confirmation flag 223n to off, the navigation continuation confirmation process (S2610) can be prevented from being executed in the navigation game process (FIG. 49).

  Next, details of the variable display setting process (S1813) executed in the main process (FIG. 41) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1813). This variable display setting process (S1813) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S3706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S3701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S3702), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S3703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S3704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3705). In the process of S3705, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. . More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3706.

  In the process of S3706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S3706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3707), and then in the process of S3706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3708).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3709), and the process proceeds to S3710.

  In the processing of S3709, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3710). This process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, the data storage process (S3817) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this data storage processing (S3817). This data storage process (S3817) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is a process for backing up information related to the navigation game when a power failure occurs.

  In the data storage process, first, data of the current time storage area 223q, the game information storage area 223h, and the game information totaling area 223i is acquired (S3801), and it is determined whether or not the navigation game is being performed (S3802). Whether or not the navigation game is being performed is determined by whether or not the navigation game flag 223j is on. If it is determined in the process of S3802 that the game is a navigation game, the data of the current time storage area 223q, the game information storage area 223h, and the game information totaling area 223i acquired in the process of S3801 are stored in the other registers 263 of the RTC 260. (S3803), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3802 that the navigation game is not being played, the process of S3802 is skipped and the process is terminated. Here, the data saved by the process of S3803 includes date information at the current time, and is used to determine whether or not the dates match in the data reading process (S1610) described above.

<Control Process Executed by Display Control Device 114 in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with command reception and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , Corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3901), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S3901) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S3901) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4001). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4002). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S4001.

  In addition, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the process of S4002, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S4002, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S4003). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S4004), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S3901 in FIG. 62). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S3902 in FIG. 62) (S4005), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process is finished.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S3901), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b are transferred and stored. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 63, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4001 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4001 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S4002 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S4003 to S4005 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S4001 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S4001. And after repeating several times including the process of S4002, you may make it perform the process of S4003-S4005.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S4003 to S4005 without performing the processes of S4001 and S4002. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3902). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, a process of clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It can be easily and immediately determined whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S3903). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power-on main image area 235a is started. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3903, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S3904). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b that is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller stores image data corresponding to the power-on variation image area from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3904, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S3905). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 80A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S6602 in FIG. 80A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 64B), the simple command determination process (FIG. 64) is performed so that the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown) are drawn. (S4208 in (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S4209 in FIG. 64B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (start winning), and the main instruction is to start the variation effect. When the control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. It is possible to perform a simple variation effect. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Immediately after the power-on main image is displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S3905, interrupt permission is set (S3906), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3906, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64B, a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 64B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 64B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4201), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S4201: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S4202) is executed, and then a display setting process (S4203) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S4202), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which V-interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of the change effect, there is a high possibility that the display change pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, it is possible to quickly grasp the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and to produce an effect image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S4203), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4202) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S4204). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S4203) or the simple display setting process (S4209). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S4205). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S4206). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4204), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S4205) are used. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4207). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S4207, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, it corresponds to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (big hit, forward / backward reach, reach other than forward / backward reach, complete miss, chance) The stop type table and the stop type counter to be compared are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4201: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S4208) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S4209) is executed, and the process of S4204 is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (S4202), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 65, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4301). If there is no unprocessed new command (S4301: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4301: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4302), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S4303).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S4304). If there is a display variation pattern command (S4304: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4305), the process returns to S4301.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S4305) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S4601).

  Here, in main controller 110, the determination of the start of variation is always performed several seconds or more away, so that two or more display variation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is not possible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S4601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variation effect having a variation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d to the display data table buffer 233d for the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can feel that the 3rd symbol display device 81 has no discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4601 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4602). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S4601 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S4603). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S4603, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4601, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S4604), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4605). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4606), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S4605, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4601. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S4602. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4604, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4304 that there is no display variation pattern command (S4304: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4306). If there is a display variation type command (S4306: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4307), and the processing returns to S4301.

  Details of the stop type command process (S4307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of the jackpots, reach other than out of front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S4701). After the change effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by comparing the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 64B) is executed. Is finally set (S4702).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4702 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S4703), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. However, before the drawing on the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S4701, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S4702.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 may actually display “special symbol” even if it is “disconnected special symbol”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” is displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 becomes “Special Jackpot”, and may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4306 that there is no display stop type command (S4306: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S4308). If there is a display round number command (S4308: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S4309), and the process returns to S4301.

  Details of the round number command process (S4309) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. The table buffer 233d is set (S4801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4805), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4308 that there is no display round number command (S4308: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a command related to display game information among unprocessed commands (S4310). ), If there is a command related to display game information (S4310: Yes), game information related command processing is executed (S4311), and the processing returns to S4301.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 66, the game information related command processing (S4311) will be described in detail. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing game information related command processing. This game information related command processing is to execute processing corresponding to a command related to display game information received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game information related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display game information input start command among unprocessed commands (S4401), and if there is a display game information input start command (S4401: Yes). ), A game information input start command process is executed (S4402), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Details of the game information input start command process (S4402) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing game information input start command processing. This game information input start command process executes a process corresponding to the display game information input start command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game information input start command process, first, a game information input start display data table corresponding to the display mode of the game information input screen (FIG. 6) indicated by the display game information input start command is determined, and the determined game information The input start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5002).

  Then, based on the game information input start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5005), and the process returns to the game information related command process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4401 that there is no display game information input start command (S4401: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display input screen update command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display input screen update command (S4403: Yes), the display input screen update command process is executed (S4404), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the game information related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display game information input start command among unprocessed commands (S4401), and if there is a display game information input start command (S4401: Yes). ), The input screen update command process is executed (S4402), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Details of the input screen update command process (S4404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing the input screen update command process. This input screen update command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display input screen update command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the input screen update command processing, first, an input screen update display data table corresponding to a display mode for updating the game information input screen indicated by the display input screen update command is determined, and the input screen update display data thus determined is determined. The table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5102).

  Then, based on the input screen update display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5101, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5105), and the process returns to the game information related command process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4403 that there is no display input screen update command (S4403: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display game information input completion command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display game information input completion command (S4405: Yes), display game information input completion command processing is executed (S4406), and the process returns to command determination processing.

  Here, the details of the game information input completion command process (S4406) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71A is a flowchart showing game information input completion command processing. This game information input completion command process executes a process corresponding to the display game information input completion command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game information input completion command processing, first, a game information input completion display data table corresponding to a display mode for completing input on the game information input screen indicated by the display game information input completion command is determined, and the determination The game information input completion display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5202).

  Then, based on the game information input completion display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5201, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5205), and the process returns to the game information related command processing.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4405 that there is no display game information input completion command (S4405: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display game information input error command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display game information input error command (S4407: Yes), the game information input error command process is executed (S4408), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the game information input error command process (S4408) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 (b) is a flowchart showing game information input error command processing. This game information input error command process executes a process corresponding to the display game information input error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game information input error command processing, first, a game information input error display data table corresponding to a display mode for displaying an input error on the game information input screen indicated by the display game information input error command is determined, The determined game information input error display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5302).

  Then, based on the game information input error display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5301, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5305), and the process returns to the game information related command processing.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4407 that there is no display game information input error command (S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display game information input stop command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display game information input stop command (S4409: Yes), the game information input stop command process is executed (S4410), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the game information input stop command process (S4410) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72A is a flowchart showing game information input stop command processing. This game information input stop command process executes a process corresponding to the display game information input stop command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game information input stop command processing, first, a game information input stop display data table corresponding to the display mode for stopping input and stopping display on the game information input screen indicated by the display game information input stop command is determined. Then, the determined game information input stop display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5402).

  Then, based on the game information input stop display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5401, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5405), and the process returns to the game information related command process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4409 that there is no display game information input stop command (S4409: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display game extension confirmation command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display game extension confirmation command (S4411) (S4411: Yes), the game extension confirmation command process is executed (S4412), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Details of the game extension confirmation command process (S4412) will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (b). FIG. 72B is a flowchart showing a game extension confirmation command process. This game extension confirmation command process executes a process corresponding to the display game extension confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game extension confirmation command process, first, a game extension confirmation display data table corresponding to the display mode of the game extension confirmation screen (FIG. 9A) indicated by the display game extension confirmation command is determined, and the determined game extension is determined. The confirmation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5502).

  Then, based on the game extension confirmation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5505), and the process returns to the game information related command processing.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4411 that there is no display game extension confirmation command (S4411: No), it is then determined whether there is a display game continuation confirmation start command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display game continuation confirmation start command (S4413), the game continuation confirmation start command process is executed (S4414), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the game continuation confirmation start command process (S4414) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 (a) is a flowchart showing a game continuation confirmation start command process. This game continuation confirmation start command process executes a process corresponding to the display game continuation confirmation start command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game continuation confirmation start command process, first, a game continuation confirmation start display data table corresponding to the display mode of the game continuation confirmation screen (FIG. 10 (a)) indicated by the display game continuation confirmation start command is determined and determined. The game continuation confirmation start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5602).

  Then, based on the game continuation confirmation start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5605), and the process returns to the game information related command process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4413 that there is no display game continuation confirmation start command (S4413: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display game continuation confirmation completion command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display game continuation confirmation completion command (S4415: Yes), the game continuation confirmation completion command process is executed (S4416), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Details of the game continuation confirmation completion command process (S4416) will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 73B is a flowchart showing a game continuation confirmation completion command process. This game continuation confirmation completion command process executes a process corresponding to the display game continuation confirmation completion command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game continuation confirmation completion command process, first, a game continuation confirmation completion display data table corresponding to the display mode for ending the game continuation confirmation screen (FIG. 10A) indicated by the display game continuation confirmation completion command is determined. Then, the determined game continuation confirmation completion display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5702).

  Then, based on the game continuation confirmation completion display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5705), and the process returns to the game information related command process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4415 that there is no display game continuation confirmation completion command (S4415: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display game result display command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display game result display command (S4417: Yes), the game result display command process is executed (S4418), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the game result display command process, first, a game result display data table corresponding to the display mode of the game result display screen (FIG. 9B) indicated by the display game result display command is determined, and the determined game result display is performed. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5802).

  Then, based on the game result display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5801, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5805), and the process returns to the game information related command process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When each process (S4402, S4404, S4406, S4408, S4410, S4412, S4414, S4416, S4418) in the game information related command process (S4311) is completed, the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4310 that there is no command related to display game information (S4310: No), then it is determined whether there is a command related to display jackpot among unprocessed commands ( If there is a command related to the display jackpot (S4412: Yes), the jackpot related command process is executed (S4313), and the process returns to S4301.

  Here, the details of the jackpot related command processing (S4313) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related command processing. This jackpot-related command processing executes processing corresponding to the command related to the display jackpot received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the jackpot-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot command among unprocessed commands (S4501). If there is a display jackpot command (S4501: Yes), the jackpot command processing is executed. The process returns to the command determination process (S4502).

  Here, the details of the jackpot command process (S4502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing. This jackpot command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the jackpot command processing, first, a jackpot display data table corresponding to the display mode when the jackpot is generated (FIG. 7) indicated by the display jackpot command is determined, and the determined jackpot display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5902).

  Then, based on the jackpot display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5905), and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4501 that there is no display jackpot command (S4501: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display navigation type command among the unprocessed commands (S4503). If there is a navigation type command for use (S4503: Yes), the navigation type command process is executed (S4504), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Details of the navigation type command process (S4504) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing navigation type command processing. This navigation type command process executes a process corresponding to the display navigation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the navigation type command process, first, a navigation type display data table corresponding to the display mode of the navigation display (FIG. 8) indicated by the display navigation type command is determined, and the determined navigation type display data table is stored in the data table storage area. The data is read from 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6002).

  Then, based on the navigation type display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6005), and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4503 that there is no display navigation type command (S4503: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command among the unprocessed commands (S4505). If there is a display jackpot start command (S4505: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S4506), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the jackpot start command process (S4506) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing jackpot start command processing. The jackpot start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot start command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the jackpot start command processing, first, the jackpot start display data table corresponding to the display mode of the jackpot start indicated by the display jackpot start command is determined, and the determined jackpot start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S6101). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6102).

  Then, based on the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6101, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6105), and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4505 that there is no display jackpot start command (S4505: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot completion command among unprocessed commands (S4507). If there is a display jackpot completion command (S4507: Yes), the jackpot completion command process is executed (S4508), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the jackpot completion command process (S4508) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing jackpot completion command processing. This jackpot completion command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot completion command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the jackpot completion command processing, first, the jackpot completion display data table corresponding to the display format of the jackpot completion indicated by the display jackpot completion command is determined, and the determined jackpot completion display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S6201). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6202).

  Then, based on the jackpot completion display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6201, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6205), and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When each process (S4502, S4504, S4506, S4508) in the jackpot command process (S4311) is completed, the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4312 that there is no command related to the display jackpot (S4312: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S4314), and the error command If there is (S4314: Yes), error command processing is executed (S4315), and the processing returns to S4301.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S4315) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S4902). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4901, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S4902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S4902, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4314 that there is no error command (S4314: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4316), and the processing returns to S4301.

  In the process of S4301 that is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4301: Yes). ), The processing of S4302 to S4316 is executed again. Then, the processing of S4302 to S4316 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S4208) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 64B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying a power-on image (not shown) from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command Only the stop type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 68 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 68 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and the others For this command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 68A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4601. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4602, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79, the details of the above-described display setting process (S4203) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 77, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S6301: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S6302 to S6304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S6305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S6302), and S6303 to S6304. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S6303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S6303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S6303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S6304).

  Details of the warning image setting process will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S6401).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S6401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 77. After the warning image setting process (S6304) or in the process of S6303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S6303: No), the process proceeds to S6305.

  In S6305, pointer update processing is executed (S6305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6501). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S6501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S6502). As a result, if it is End information (S6502: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S6503: Yes), the display data is displayed. Time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S6504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6505), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the display data table for demonstration, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S6503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S6506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6502: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S6306 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S6308: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S6309).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S6309: Yes), the confirmation display effect has not yet been produced and the decision display effect has been performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S6314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S6315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S4204), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S6315. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6309, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S6309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S6316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6316: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the demonstration display data table is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S6317), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6318). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6321), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S6316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S6316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new variation pattern command for display is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 64B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S4209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. (Not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d, which is a display data table that stipulates that display is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S4205), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6601: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S6602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S6601, that is, if it is off (S6601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S6602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S6701), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S6701: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S6702). In the process of S6702, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S6702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6702: Yes), the process proceeds to S6703. Also, as a result of the process of S6701, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6701: No), the process proceeds to S6703.

  In the process of S6703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S6703: No), A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing in S6703 (S6703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6705), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 64B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S4208 in FIG. 64B) and the simple display setting process (see S4209 in FIG. 64B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 65 to 76) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 77 to 79) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 81) (see S6601: No in FIG. 80A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. It is possible to perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S6603), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S4205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6305) of the display setting process (S4203) executed previously is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S6801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S6802), and if it is transfer data information (S6802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S6804), and the process proceeds to step S6805.

  In the process of S6802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S6802: No), the processes of S6803 and S6804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S6805. In the process of S6805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S6805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S6806).

  In the process of S6806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S6806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6806: Yes), the process proceeds to S6807. Also, as a result of the process of S6805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S6805: No), the process proceeds to S6807.

  In the process of S6807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6807). If the transfer start flag is on (S6807: Yes), there is image data to start transfer, so the transfer start flag is present. (S6808), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S6803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S6809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6807: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S6809, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6809). The determination in the process of S6809 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6809 (S6809: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6809 (S6809: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S6810). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S6810, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S6811), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, details of the above-described drawing process (S4206), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4204) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information necessary for drawing each sprite) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S4205), the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated (S6901). That is, in the process of S6901, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4204). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4205), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S6902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S6903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 36B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 to 91, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the special symbol 2 is preferentially started to change. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are simultaneously changed. The configuration of the first embodiment in that at the end of the jackpot game, which one of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 should be targeted is displayed based on the game information and the current time Is different. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 83, the structure of the game board 13 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 83 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the first entrance 64a is arranged at the lower left of the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13 and the second entrance at the right side of the first embodiment. The difference is that 64b is arranged.

  With this configuration, the launch handle 51 is adjusted so that the game ball reaches the upper center position of the variable display device unit 80 to fire the game ball, and the left and right flow paths of the variable display device unit 80 are played. By launching the game ball so that the ball flows down, it is possible to enter the game ball into both the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Therefore, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be changed at the same time to play a game efficiently.

  Further, by adjusting the strength of the firing handle 51 (for example, firing at the maximum strength) so that more game balls pass on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed state). The game ball can be configured to easily enter the second entrance 64b. Therefore, the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) in the special symbol 2 can be increased.

  Further, by adjusting the firing handle 51 so that more game balls pass through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (for example, the strength of firing slightly exceeds the tip of the rail 61), It is possible to make it easier for a game ball to enter the ball opening 64a. Therefore, the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) in the special symbol 1 can be increased.

  As described above, by arranging the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b as in this embodiment, the player can intentionally control which special symbol is used for lottery. it can. In addition, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the ratio (probability) of the jackpot type to be selected is different between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, so that it matches the target and the current target achievement state. And can play games.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area so that the game balls can pass through the left and right sides thereof, so that the flow path of the game area can be partitioned, and the left flow path and the right flow path In addition, it is configured such that the entrance can be controlled by the player by placing the entrances respectively.

  In addition, since an electric accessory is provided at the second entrance 64b, the player can suppress the decrease of the holding ball by playing the game in the right-handed state during the short-time game or the probable game after the big hit. Can play games.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
The electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b, and the contents of the navigation selection table 222a of the sound lamp control device 113 are compared with the first embodiment. And is different in that it has been changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 84 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 113 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203t, and the special figure 1 fluctuation time are compared with the first embodiment. A counter 203u and a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203v are added. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203q is a flag indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is determined to be a jackpot. The special figure 1 big hit flag 203q is set to ON when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 1 that starts the change is a win (FIG. 90, S457). It is set off (not shown) based on the start of jackpot game being set.

  The special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is different from the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q only in that the special figure 1 is changed to the special figure 2, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 is temporarily stopped. In the present embodiment, the variation of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is configured to be simultaneously variable, and when one of the symbols is stopped and displayed with a special symbol that is a big hit, the other special symbol that is changing is temporarily stopped, After the game is over, the remaining changes are executed again. Here, when the variation of the special symbol 2 is stopped, it is set to ON when the determination result is a big hit (FIG. 96, S258). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 92, S255) is set to OFF by the processing of S663. Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop process (FIG. 92, S255) is not executed during the jackpot game (including the period in which the jackpot flag 203m is on), so the temporary stop is canceled when the jackpot ends. Is done.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203t is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is temporarily stopped. Since the special symbol 1 is different from the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s only in that the special symbol 1 is changed to the special symbol 2, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203u is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203v is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2.

  Next, the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 85A to FIG. 85C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first gate selection table b1 of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are set so that the jackpot type selected based on the passage through the first gate is different. More specifically, when the game ball passes through the first gate when the special symbol 1 is a big hit, the big hit type is acquired based on the special figure 1 first gate selection table. Further, when the game ball passes through the first gate at the time of the big hit of the special symbol 2, the big hit type is acquired based on the selection table for the special gate 1 of the first gate.

  FIG. 85 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 first gate selection table 202b1a. In the special figure 1 first gate selection table 202b1a, a big hit D1 (9R probability variable big hit) and a big hit D2 (9R short time big hit) are set. Here, the probability that the jackpot D1 and the jackpot D2 are selected is set to ½.

  FIG. 85 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 first gate selection table 202b1b. In the special figure 2 first gate selection table 202b1b, jackpot E1 (6R probability variation jackpot), jackpot F1 (12R probability variation jackpot), jackpot E2 (6R hour / short jackpot), jackpot F2 (12R hour / big jackpot) are set. The selection probability of jackpot E1, jackpot F1 (probable variation jackpot), jackpot E2, jackpot F2 is set to 1/2. Moreover, the selection probability of jackpot E2 and jackpot F2 is comprised by 1/2. The selection probability of jackpot E2 and jackpot F2 is also set to 1/2.

  As a result, the special symbol 1 is a big hit, and when the first gate 650a is passed, a nine-round big hit game is reliably obtained. On the other hand, in the special symbol 2, either the 6th round or the 12th round is selected with a probability of 1/2 by lottery.

  FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second gate selection table 202b2. In the second gate dedicated selection table 202b2, a special figure 1 second gate selection table 202b2a and a special figure 2 second gate selection table 202b2b are set.

  FIG. 86 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 second gate selection table 202b2a. The special figure 1 second gate selection table 202b2a is a table used for selecting a jackpot type when a special ball 1 is a big hit and a game ball passes through the second gate 650b.

  In the special figure 1 second gate selection table 202b2a, the jackpot G1 (7R probability variation jackpot), the jackpot H1 (11R probability variation jackpot), the jackpot G2 (7R hour / short jackpot), and the jackpot H2 (11R hour / big jackpot) are set. The ratio at which the jackpot G1, the jackpot H1, the jackpot G2, and the jackpot H2 (probability or short time) are selected is ½. The selection ratio between the jackpot G1 and the jackpot H1 is ½, and the selection ratio between the jackpot G2 and the jackpot H2 is ½.

  FIG. 86 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 second gate selection table 202b2b. This special figure 2 second gate selection table 202b2b is a table used for selection of the big hit type when the special symbol 2 is a big hit and the game ball passes through the second gate 650b.

  In the special figure 2 second gate selection table 202b2b, jackpot I1 (2R probability variation jackpot), jackpot J1 (16R probability variation jackpot), jackpot I2 (2R hour / short jackpot) and jackpot J2 (16R hour / short jackpot) are set. The selection ratio of jackpot I1, jackpot J1, jackpot I2, jackpot J2 (probability and short time) is set at 1/2. The selection ratio between the jackpot I1 and the jackpot J1 is 1/2, and the selection ratio between the jackpot I2 and the jackpot J2 is set at 1/2.

  In this way, when the second gate 650b, which is a big hit in the special symbol 1, is passed, the big hit of the 7th round or the 11th round is selected with a probability of 1/2. As described above, if a game ball is passed through the first gate 650a where the special symbol 1 is a big win, a 9-round big hit is always obtained (100% selection rate). The first gate 650a is passed through. However, when the player has a large number of target set difference balls, it is necessary to pass the second gate 650b and aim for a big hit of 11 rounds. In the configuration of the present embodiment, such navigation suitable for the player is configured to be executable.

  In the special symbol 2, at the first gate 650a, 6 rounds or 12 rounds are drawn with a probability of 1/2. In addition, at the second gate 650b, a lottery of 2 rounds or 16 rounds is drawn with a probability of 1/2. Therefore, for the player, the second gate is highly likely to obtain two rounds and is a risky choice.

  Further, in the comparison between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, in the special symbol 1, the first gate 650a is allowed to pass, so that it is possible to reliably obtain a nine-round jackpot. On the other hand, in the special symbol 2, there is a probability that a jackpot smaller than 9 rounds is selected regardless of whether it is the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b, and the risk is set large for the player.

  Therefore, if the number of rounds required to achieve the goal is 9 or less, it is possible to notify the player of a special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player by navigating so that the special symbol 1 is a big hit. . In addition, if the game requires nine rounds or more to achieve the goal and the remaining game time is short, the player will be able to achieve the goal by notifying them to play the game with the special symbol 2 as a big hit. can do.

  In the present embodiment, the frequency of entering the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b can be varied by separating the right strike and the left strike according to the navigation. Therefore, the game can be performed so as to be closer to the player's goal.

  Next, in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the contents of the navigation selection table 222a are changed from the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the navigation selection table 222a in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87, the navigation selection table 222a in the second embodiment defines the navigation type to be selected depending on the number of remaining target rounds and whether or not the game time is at the end. The determination of whether or not the remaining target round number and the game time are in the final stage is the same as the description of the navigation selection table 222a in the first embodiment, and will be omitted.

  If the remaining target round number is less than or equal to 0 (ie, the current difference ball number exceeds the target difference ball), it is up to the player to select whether the game is at the end of the game and whether to make a right or left strike The navigation type D that is displayed (that is, the right-handed or left-handed one is not recommended) is selected. This is because the target difference ball is already exceeded, and the target difference ball is reached (reached) regardless of which gate is selected.

  When the remaining target number of rounds is 1 to 9, the navigation type E that is a display that recommends left-handed aiming at the lottery with the special symbol 1 is selected regardless of whether or not the game is at the end of the game. This is because if the special symbol 1 is a big hit, if the game ball is passed to the first gate 650a, the big hit types that can be selected are D1 and D2 which are the big hits of 9 rounds. This is because, regardless of which jackpot type is selected, the target difference ball can be reached.

  When the remaining target number of rounds is 10 or more, if the game is not the final stage, the navigation type E which is a display recommending left-handed aiming at the lottery with the special symbol 1 is selected. This is because there is enough game time left, so the least number of rounds that can be selected is aiming for the special symbol 1 which is more than the special symbol 2, so that the target difference will be steadily achieved. The purpose is to get closer. On the other hand, if the game is in the final stage, the navigation type F, which is a display that recommends right-handed aiming for a lottery with the special symbol 2, is selected. This is because there is not enough game time left, so the number of rounds that can be selected will be the target during the less game time by aiming for the special symbol 2 with the largest number of rounds than the special symbol 1 The purpose is to reach the difference.

  As described above, the navigation selection table 222a should be appropriately designed according to the game value obtained in the jackpot game, and is not limited to the contents described above. In addition, a table may be prepared and defined for cases where the jackpot is included in the hold. Thereby, the navigation display for reaching the target difference ball can be selected with higher accuracy. Furthermore, the right-handed or left-handed information performed by the player and the information of the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b selected by the player when the big hit occurs are recorded, and based on the recorded information. The contents of the table may be changed.

  In the present embodiment, in the non-time-saving normal game state, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are drawn at the same time, and the game is alternately and efficiently played in the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Since the ball is configured to enter, it is possible to allow the player to play a game efficiently and fairly without giving an advantage or disadvantage to the special symbol type.

  On the other hand, during the probability variation gaming state and the short-time game, the player mainly executes the right-handed game aiming at the right second entrance 64b, so the rate of entering the second entrance 64b is high. . Further, the variation time of the special symbol 2 is extremely shorter than that of the special symbol 2 in the probability variation game and in the short time, so that the variation digestion in the special symbol 2 can be increased in a short time. Therefore, a lottery game can be performed with the special symbol 2 that is more advantageous to the player, and more benefits can be given to the player.

  In addition, during the probability change and in the short time, the lottery game can be performed under advantageous conditions by switching the special symbol 2 so that the special symbol 2 is changed with priority, while allowing the player to play the game more efficiently.

  In this embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot type to which the probability variation game is given is the same for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, but not limited thereto, and the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured to be different. Also good.

  Specifically, during probability change and time reduction, the special symbol 1 is set as the rate at which the jackpot type to which the probability variation gaming state and the normal gaming state are given at a rate of 50% is selected. It is set so that the probability variation game is selected at the rate of%. With this setting, the ratio of the special symbol 2 to be selected is set to 70% in 0.1 seconds by lottery, the ratio selected in 3 seconds is set to 25%, and the ratio selected in 10 seconds. Set to 5%. By configuring in this way, as the variation time of 0.1 seconds is selected, the reserved digest time of the special symbol 2 becomes earlier, the variation of the special symbol 1 is easily started, and the probability variation gaming state is ended. There is a high risk that On the other hand, by selecting a variation time of 10 seconds, it becomes easy to save the special symbol 2 hold, and it is possible to set a high possibility that the probability variation game will be continued.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to generate a jackpot efficiently in a short period of time by changing simultaneously, and during the probability change, either of the special symbols will change whether or not the probability change game can be continued. Can provide a player with innovative gameplay.

  If the percentage of probability change is changed depending on the game state, winning a prize during the jackpot will set the big prize opening to which the probability change will be given and the normal big prize opening. This may be realized by configuring which large winning a prize opening is opened.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 88, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 (S150) performed by MPU201 in the main controller 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process 2 (S150). This special symbol variation process 2 (S150) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the third symbol display performed in the first symbol display device 37. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 2, it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S251). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S251: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not being hit (S251: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 is changing (S252). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 is fluctuating (S252: Yes), the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 is executed (S253), and if it is determined that the special symbol 1 is not fluctuating (S252: No), it is special. The symbol 1 fluctuation stop process is executed (S254). The special symbol 1 variation start process (S253) and the special symbol 1 stop process (S254) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91 and FIG.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 is changing (S255). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 is fluctuating (S255: Yes), a special symbol 2 variation start process is executed (S256), and if it is determined that the special symbol 2 is not fluctuating (S255: No), the special symbol (2) Fluctuation stop processing is executed (S257). The special symbol 2 variation start process 2 (S256) and the special symbol 2 stop process (S257) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95 and FIG.

  When the processing of S251, S256, or S257 is completed, this processing is terminated and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S252) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S253). The special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S253) is executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 88), and the variation of the special symbol 1 is based on the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (N1). It is a process for performing control which starts.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is acquired (S351), and the value of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is greater than zero. It is determined whether or not (S352). If the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is 0 (S352: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is larger than 0 (S352: Yes), processing for starting the variation of the special symbol 1 is executed (S353 to S356).

  Specifically, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is decremented by 1 (S353), and the data in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number storage area 203a is shifted (S354). In the process of S354, data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the hold first area → execution area, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, etc. Shift data. Next, a special symbol 1 big hit determination process is executed (S355), a special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process is executed (S356), and this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 90, the special symbol 1 big hit determination process (S355) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 big hit determination process (S355). The special symbol 1 big hit determination process (S355) is executed in the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (see FIG. 89), and the special symbol 1 is lottery based on the data of the special symbol 1 holding ball execution area 203a. This is a process for setting according to the result.

  In the special symbol 1 big hit determination process, first, data of the special symbol 1 reserved ball execution area 203a is acquired (S451). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S452). If it is determined that the probability is changing (S452: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. However, if it is determined that there is no probability change (S452: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (S454). Here, whether or not the probability change is in progress is determined by whether or not the probability change flag 203g is on. If the probability change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the probability change is in progress and the probability change flag 203g is off. In some cases, it is determined that there is no probability change.

  After the processing of S453 or S454, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q or the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is on (S455). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203q or the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203r is turned on when the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is determined to be a big jackpot. Here, if the special symbol 2 for which a change is being performed simultaneously is a big hit, the special symbol 2 big hit flag 203r is turned on. Therefore, before setting the big win for the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2 Whether or not is a big hit.

  When it is determined in the process of S455 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q or the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is on (S455: Yes), the off symbol of the special symbol 1 is set in the first symbol display device 37 ( S460). Here, when the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203q or the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203r is on, the special symbol 1 is set to be out of the design symbol. Can be prevented.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S455 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q or the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is not on (S455: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big win (S456), When it is determined that the jackpot is big (S456: Yes), the jackpot is set for the special symbol 1 (S457 to S459). When it is determined that the jackpot is not big (S456: No), the first symbol display device 37 is set. The off symbol of the special symbol 1 is set in (S460).

  In the jackpot setting for the special symbol 1 (S457 to S459), the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON for the special symbol 1 (S457), the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is set to the jackpot (S458), Based on the value of the per-type counter C2, the jackpot symbol of the special symbol 1 displayed on the first symbol display device is set (S459). When the process of S459 or S460 is completed, the present process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S356) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S356). The special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S356) is executed in the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (see FIG. 89), and is a process for setting a variation pattern based on the lottery result of the special symbol 1. .

  In the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is a big hit (S551). When it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is a jackpot (S551: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S552), and the jackpot type table is selected based on the jackpot type. (S553). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is not a big hit (S552: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S554).

  When the processing of S553 or S554 is completed, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter (S555), and a special figure 1 variation pattern command is generated based on the selected variation pattern (S556). Based on the variation pattern, a counter value is set in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203o (S557), and this processing is terminated. The special figure 1 variation pattern command generated in the process of S556 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. Among them, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the special pattern 1 variation pattern command, it transmits the display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 (see S3704 in FIG. 60). The display control device 114 displays a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received variation pattern command for display.

  Next, the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop process (S255) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 fluctuation stopping process (S255). This special symbol 1 fluctuation stopping process (S255) is executed in the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (see FIG. 88), and is a process for performing control to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol 1.

  In the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on (S651). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on (S651: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned off (S663), and the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned off. 1 Fluctuation stop command is set (S664), and this process ends. The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON when the special figure 2 is a big hit at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. Thereby, when the jackpot game of special figure 2 is started, the fluctuation | variation of special figure 1 which is changing simultaneously can be temporarily stopped.

  In addition, when the jackpot game is being executed, the special symbol 1 variation stop process (FIG. 92, S255) is not performed, so the special diagram 1 variation stop flag 203s is set to OFF based on the end of the jackpot game. Then, the fluctuation can be resumed for the remaining fluctuation time.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is not on (S651: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203u is subtracted and updated (S652) to determine whether or not the fluctuation time is over. (S653). Whether or not the variable time has ended is determined by whether or not the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203u is 0. If the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203u is 0, the variable time has ended. judge.

  If it is determined in the processing of S653 that it is not the end of the fluctuation time (S653: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time is over (S653: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q is on (S654). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203q is turned on for the special figure 1 (S654: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203t is set to on (S655), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203t is turned on. Is set (S656), and the big hit flag 203m is set to ON (S657).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q is not ON (S654: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S658), and the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than zero. (S658: Yes), the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S659). If the hour / hour counter 203h is 0 (S660: No), the process of S659 is skipped and the process proceeds to S660.

  When the processing of S657, S658, or S659 is completed, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set (S660), the fluctuation of special symbol 1 of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S661), and the time-shortage counter 203h is reset. (S662), this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation start process 2 (S257) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process 2 (S257). This special symbol 2 variation start process 2 (S257) is executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 88), and the variation of the special symbol 2 based on the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2). It is a process for performing control which starts.

  In the special symbol 2 variation start process 2, first, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is acquired (S751), and the acquired value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is 0. It is determined whether it is larger (S752). If the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is 0 (S752: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is larger than 0 (S752: Yes), processing for starting the variation of the special symbol 2 is executed (S753 to S756).

  Specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is decremented by 1 (S753), and the data in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b is shifted (S754). In the process of S754, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the hold first area → execution area, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, etc. Shift data. Next, a special symbol 2 big hit determination process is executed (S755), a special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S756), and this process is terminated.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol 2 big hit determination process (S755) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 big hit determination process (S755). The special symbol 2 big hit determination process (S755) is executed in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process 2 (see FIG. 93), and the special symbol 2 is lottery based on the data of the special symbol 2 holding ball execution area 203b. This is a process for setting according to the result.

  In the special symbol 2 big hit determination process, first, data of the special symbol 2 reserved ball execution area 203b is acquired (S851). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S852). If it is determined that the probability is changing (S852: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. However, if it is determined that the probability change is not in progress (S852: No), a lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (S854). Here, whether or not the probability change is in progress is determined based on whether or not the probability change flag 203g is on. If the probability change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the probability change is in progress. If it is not on, it is determined that there is no certain change.

  After the processing of S853 or S854, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q or the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is on (S855). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203q or the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203r is turned on when the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is determined to be a big jackpot. Here, if the special symbol 1 whose change is being executed is a big hit, the special symbol 1 big hit flag 203q is turned on. Therefore, before the special symbol 2 is set as the big hit, the special symbol 1 Whether or not is a big hit.

  When it is determined in the process of S855 that the special symbol 1 big hit flag 203q or the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is on (S855: Yes), the out symbol of the special symbol 2 is set in the first symbol display device 37 ( S860). Here, when the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203q or the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203r is on, the special symbol 2 is set to be out of the design symbol. Can be prevented.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S855 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q or the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is not ON (S855: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big win (S856), When it is determined that the jackpot is big (S856: Yes), the jackpot is set for the special symbol 2 (S857 to S859). When it is determined that the jackpot is not big (S856: No), the first symbol display device 37 is set. The off symbol of the special symbol 2 is set in (S860).

  In the jackpot setting for the special symbol 2 (S857 to S859), the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203r is set to ON (S857), the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is set to the jackpot (S858), and the acquired first Based on the value of the winning type counter C2, the jackpot symbol of the special symbol 2 displayed on the first symbol display device is set (S859). When the process of S859 or S860 is completed, the present process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S756) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S756). This special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S756) is executed in the special symbol 2 variation start processing 2 (see FIG. 93), and is a process for setting a variation pattern based on the lottery result of the special symbol 2. .

  In the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is a big hit (S951). When it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is a jackpot (S951: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S952), and the jackpot type table is selected based on the jackpot type. (S953). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is not a big hit (S951: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S954).

  When the process of S953 or S954 is finished, a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S955), and a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is generated based on the selected fluctuation pattern (S956). Based on the variation pattern, a counter value is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203p (S957), and this process is terminated. The special figure 2 variation pattern command generated in the process of S956 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. Among them, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command, the sound lamp control apparatus 113 transmits the display fluctuation pattern command to the display control apparatus 114 (see S3704 in FIG. 60). The display control device 114 displays a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received variation pattern command for display.

  Next, the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop process (S258) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 fluctuation stopping process (S258). This special symbol 2 fluctuation stopping process (S258) is executed in the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (see FIG. 88), and is a process for performing control to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol 2.

  In the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203t is on (S1051). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is on (S1051: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is turned off (S1063), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is turned off. A two-variation stop command is set (S1064), and this process ends. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203t is set to ON when the special figure 1 is a big hit at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1. Thereby, when the jackpot game of special figure 1 is started, the fluctuation | variation of special figure 2 which is fluctuating simultaneously can be stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag is not on (S1051: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203p is subtracted and updated (S1052), and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is over. (S1053). Whether or not the variable time is ended is determined by whether or not the value of the special figure 2 variable time counter 203v is 0. If the value of the special figure 2 variable time counter 203v is 0, the variable time is ended. judge.

  If it is determined in the change stop process in S1053 that the change time has not ended (S1053: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable time is over (S1053: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is on (S1054). When it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is on (S1054: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S1055), and a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating on is set. (S1056), the start of jackpot is set (S1057).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is not on (S1054: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S1058), and the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than zero. (S1058: Yes), the time reduction counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S1059). If the time reduction counter 203h is 0 (S1058: No), the processing of S1059 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1060.

  When the processing of S1057, S1058 or S1059 is completed, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set (S1060), the fluctuation of special symbol 1 of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S1061), and the time-shortage counter 203h is reset. (S1062), and this process ends.

  Next, processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the jackpot related process (S1912) are changed. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 97, the jackpot related process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, when a jackpot end command is received (S2010: Yes), the 1R difference ball calculation process is executed (S2011), and then the navigation process 2 (S2051) is performed with respect to the first embodiment. It differs in that it is executed. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the navigation process 2 (S2051) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the navigation process 2 (S2051). The navigation process 2 (S2051) is executed in the jackpot related process (see FIG. 97), and displays or suggests that the first ball slot 64a wins a game ball when the jackpot ends. This is a process for causing the 3rd symbol display device 81 to display a display suggesting that a game ball is won in 64b.

  In the navigation process 2, first, data of the target difference ball storage area 223h2 of the game information storage area 223h is acquired (S2151), and the value (P1) of the total number of hit balls counter 223i1 of the game information totaling area 223i is acquired. The value (P2) of the ball number counter 223i2 and data (1R difference ball number) of the 1R difference ball storage area 223i4 are acquired (S2152). And the remaining target difference ball number is calculated by subtracting the current difference ball (P2-P1) from the target difference ball number acquired in the processing of S2151, and the remaining target difference ball number is calculated. The number is calculated by dividing by the number of 1R difference balls acquired in the process of S2152 (S2153). Next, a display navigation type command is set based on the remaining target round number calculated in the process of S2153 and the navigation selection table 222a (S2154), and this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the navigation is performed based on the current number of difference balls and the remaining game time in the case of a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and is output from the main controller 113. Based on the winning information command, it may be configured to discriminate the determination result of the reserved ball and perform the navigation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the holding ball is hit, and in some cases, it is possible to navigate based on a plurality of jackpots, such as navigating to a high-risk gate. .

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines first which jackpot type is selected when it passes a 1st gate and a 2nd gate, and navigates. In this navigation, instead of navigating every time, a navigation that does not determine the jackpot type and a navigation that has been determined may be executed separately by lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the table for selecting the jackpot type for the first gate 650a and the second gate 650b is constant. However, the table is not limited to this, and the table may be varied by lottery. In this case, a plurality of tables are set and one table is set from the plurality of tables by changing the table to be set according to the gaming state (for example, probability change, normal, etc.) or executing a predetermined lottery. You may comprise as follows.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.
<Characteristic A group> (Information on the pounding gate based on game information)
And a lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the entrance of the game ball into the entrance. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result, the bonus game establishment means for establishing the bonus game grant condition, and the first area through which the game ball can pass and the first area are different. A first bonus game that selects a type of the bonus game based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first zone when the bonus game granting condition is established by the second zone and the bonus game establishment means. A second bonus game selection that selects a type of the bonus game based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the second area when the bonus game granting condition is established by the selection means and the bonus game establishment means. Means and the first privilege game selection hand Alternatively, in a gaming machine having a privilege game granting unit that grants a privilege game selected by the second privilege game selection unit, a game ball is placed in one of the first region and the second region Based on the game information, when the bonus game granting condition is established by the input means capable of inputting game information for selecting a notification mode for prompting the player to perform the bonus game and the bonus game establishment means A notification mode selection unit that selects the notification mode; and a notification unit that performs notification based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection unit; and the first privilege game selection unit and the second privilege. The gaming machines A1 are characterized in that the award games selected by the game selecting means are set so that the ratios for selecting the award games that are advantageous to the player are different.

  According to the gaming machine A1, whether or not to give a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the entrance of the game ball that can be entered and the game ball entering the entrance of the game. A lottery means for executing a lottery, a bonus game establishment means for establishing the bonus game grant condition when a lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result, and a first area through which a game ball can pass Based on the second area different from the first area, and when the bonus game granting condition is established by the bonus game establishment means, the type of the bonus game is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first area. When the bonus game granting condition is established by the first bonus game selection means and the bonus game establishment means, the bonus game type is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second area. Second privilege game selection means to select, and previous A bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game selected by the first bonus game selection means or the second bonus game selection means, and a game ball in one of the first area and the second area When the bonus game granting condition is established by an input means capable of inputting game information for selecting a notification mode for prompting the player to enter the game, and the bonus game establishment means, the game information A notification mode selection unit that selects the notification mode based on the notification mode, a notification unit that performs notification based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection unit, and the first privilege game selection unit and the The award games respectively selected by the second award game selection means are set so that the ratios for selecting the award games that are advantageous to the player are different. Thereby, the area | region where a player enters a game ball can be recognized easily. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

  In the gaming machine A1, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the entrance, and the lottery condition for executing the lottery based on the information acquired by the lottery means Based on the storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means and the information stored in the storage means, the lottery result can be determined before the lottery condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A2 comprising: a pre-discriminating unit; and a notification mode selection unit that selects the notification mode based on a discrimination result by the pre-article discrimination unit and the game information.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the acquisition unit acquires information based on the game ball entering the entrance and the acquisition unit until the lottery condition for executing the lottery based on the information acquired by the lottery unit is satisfied. Storage means capable of storing the acquired information, and preliminary determination means capable of determining the lottery result before the lottery condition is satisfied based on the information stored in the storage means The notification mode selection unit selects the notification mode based on the determination result by the pre-article determination unit and the game information. Thereby, more accurate notification can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easier to understand for the player.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a swing that assigns a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter and whether the game ball that has passed through the passage flows down into the first area or the second area. The switching condition of the distribution member and the distribution member is changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down in the first area and a second state in which the game ball can flow down in the second area. Switching means capable of switching based on the establishment, and the notification mode includes information indicating whether the distribution member is in the first state or the second state. A gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, a passing port having an opening through which a game ball can enter, a sorting member that sorts whether the game ball that has passed through the passing port flows down into the first region or the second region, and Based on the fact that the switching member is switched between a first state in which the game ball can flow down in the first area and a second state in which the game ball can flow down in the second area. Switching means capable of switching, and the notification mode includes information indicating whether the distribution member is in the first state or the second state. Thereby, the player can be informed of the state of the sorting member in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the timing at which the game ball reaches the sorting member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the game machine is provided with a clocking means capable of clocking, and the player inputs time information that can be clocked by at least the clocking means by the input means, The notifying means selects the content of the notifying mode based on the timing information counted by the timing means and the inputted timing information, the gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. That is, a timing means capable of timing is provided, and at least timing information that can be measured by the timing means is input by the player by the input means, and the notification means is provided by the timing means. The content of the notification mode is selected based on the timed information to be timed and the input timed information. Thereby, the notification based on the input timing information can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game more tailored to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the notification mode is information based on profits given by the executed bonus game after the game information is input by the input means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A5, characterized by including:

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the notification mode is executed after the game information is input by the input means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the information based on the profits given by the special game is included, there is an effect that the player can recognize the profits given by the special game and can play the game by recognizing the state of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, at least a predetermined even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine, and a power interruption determining means for determining a power interruption state in which the power supplied to the gaming machine is a predetermined voltage or less The game information set in the storage means is stored on the basis of the storage means having a storage area capable of storing the game information for a period of time and the interruption state being determined by the interruption determination means. A gaming machine A6 having storage control means for storing.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, an interruption determination unit that determines an interruption state in which the electric power supplied to the gaming machine is equal to or lower than a predetermined voltage, and the gaming information is stored for at least a predetermined period even when no electric power is supplied to the gaming machine. Storage means having a storable storage area, and storage control means for storing the game information set in the storage means based on the fact that the power interruption state is determined by the power interruption determination means. Is. Thereby, even when a power interruption occurs, game information can be held. Therefore, even when the player returns from the power interruption, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the trouble that the game information must be input again.

  In the gaming machine A6, the storage means is provided in the timing means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, since the storage means is provided in the timing means, there is an effect that the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, based on the fact that electric power is supplied to the gaming machine, a storage discriminating unit that discriminates whether or not the gaming information is stored in the storage unit, and the storage discriminating unit stores the gaming information. A gaming machine A8, characterized by having setting means for setting game information when it is determined that the game information is stored.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that power is supplied to the gaming machine, a storage discriminating unit that discriminates whether or not the gaming information is stored in the storage unit, and the gaming discriminating unit stores the gaming information. And setting means for setting the game information when it is determined.

  Thereby, the player can set arbitrary game information. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic group B> (Notice of pounding gate guidance based on game information in simultaneously changing gaming machines)
A game ball has entered a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance or the second entrance. A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether or not to give a bonus game advantageous to the player, and a lottery result based on the fact that the lottery means has entered the first entrance slot. Display means capable of simultaneously displaying identification information and second identification information indicating a lottery result based on having entered the second entrance, the first identification information and the second identification information Are displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display means displays a specific lottery result on the display means by either the first identification information or the second identification information. When the identification information indicating is displayed, the bonus game grant condition is satisfied The first area when the bonus game granting condition is established by the bonus game establishment means, the first area through which the game ball can pass, the second area different from the first area, and the bonus game establishment means When the bonus game granting condition is established by the first bonus game selecting means for selecting the bonus game type and the bonus game establishment means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second area, Based on the passing of the game ball, the bonus game selected by the second bonus game selection means for selecting the type of the bonus game and the bonus game selected by the first bonus game selection means or the second bonus game selection means is given. Bonus game granting means and input means capable of inputting game information for selecting a notification mode for prompting the player to enter a game ball in one of the first area and the second area And the special Based on the notification mode selection means for selecting the notification mode based on the game information and the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection unit when the bonus game granting condition is established by the game establishment unit. An informing means for informing, wherein the first award game selecting means or the second award game means is the result of the specific lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance. The ratio of selecting a special game that is advantageous to the player is different from the case where the specific lottery result is obtained based on the entrance to the second entrance. A gaming machine B1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first entrance through which a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance or the second entrance Based on the fact that a game ball has entered, a lottery means for executing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a special game advantageous to the player, and that the lottery means has entered the first entrance Display means capable of simultaneously displaying first identification information indicating a lottery result based on and second identification information indicating a lottery result based on having entered the second entrance, and the first identification Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the information and the second identification information on the display means respectively, and the dynamic display means allows either the first identification information or the second identification information to be When identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, A bonus game establishment means for establishing a given condition, a first area through which a game ball can pass, a second area different from the first area, and a bonus game granting condition established by the bonus game establishment means When the bonus game granting condition is established by the first bonus game selection means for selecting the bonus game type and the bonus game establishment means based on the passing of the game ball through the first area, Based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the second area, the second privilege game selection means for selecting the type of the privilege game, and the first privilege game selection means or the second privilege game selection means are selected. Game information for selecting a bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game, and a notification mode for prompting the player to enter a game ball in one of the first area and the second area. Enterable When the bonus game granting condition is established by the input means and the bonus game establishment means, the notification mode selection means for selecting the notification mode based on the game information, and the notification mode selection means are selected. Notification means for performing notification based on the notification mode, wherein the first privilege game selection means or the second privilege game means is configured to select the specific lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance. The ratio of selecting the award game that is advantageous to the player is different between the case where the result is obtained and the case where the specific lottery result is obtained based on the entry to the second entrance. It is what.

  Thereby, the area | region where a player enters a game ball can be recognized easily. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

  In the gaming machine B1, the game machine B1 includes a partition member that divides a game area in which a game ball can flow down into a first game area and a second game area different from the first game area, The gaming machine B2, wherein the second entrance is disposed in the first entrance area in the second entrance.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a partition member that divides a game area in which a game ball can flow into a first game area and a second game area that is different from the first game area, and the first entrance has the first game area. In the region, the second entrance is disposed at each of the second entrances. Thereby, it is possible to play a game by entering any of the first entrance and the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game more suited to the player.

  The gaming machine B2 has a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area, and an adjusting means capable of adjusting the launching force of the game ball launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player. The launching means is configured to be able to launch a game ball by the adjusting means so that the game ball can easily flow down to either the first game area or the second game area. A gaming machine B3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area, and an adjusting means capable of adjusting the launching force of the game ball fired by the launching means based on a player's operation. The means is configured to be able to launch the game ball by the adjusting means so that the game ball can easily flow down to either the first game area or the second game area. Thereby, it is possible to play a game by entering any of the first entrance and the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game more suited to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the game machine has a clocking means capable of clocking, and the player inputs time information that can be clocked by at least the clocking means by the input means, The notifying means selects the content of the notifying mode based on the timing information counted by the timing means and the inputted timing information, the gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, a timing means capable of timing is provided, and at least timing information that can be measured by the timing means is input by the player by the input means, and the notification means is provided by the timing means. The content of the notification mode is selected based on the timed time information and the input timed information. Thereby, the notification based on the input timing information can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game more tailored to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the notification mode is information based on profits provided by the privileged game executed after a predetermined condition is satisfied after the game information is input by the input means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by including

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B4, the notification mode includes the bonus game executed between the time when the game information is input by the input means and the time when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the information based on the profit granted by the game is included, there is an effect that the player can recognize the profit given by the privilege game, and can play the game by recognizing the state of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, at least predetermined even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine and power interruption judgment means for judging a power interruption state where the power supplied to the gaming machine is a predetermined voltage or less The game information set in the storage means is stored on the basis of the storage means having a storage area capable of storing the game information for a period of time and the interruption state being determined by the interruption determination means. A gaming machine B6 having storage control means for storing.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effects are produced. That is, an interruption determination unit that determines an interruption state in which the electric power supplied to the gaming machine is equal to or lower than a predetermined voltage, and the gaming information is stored for at least a predetermined period even when no electric power is supplied to the gaming machine. Storage means having a storable storage area, and storage control means for storing the game information set in the storage means based on the fact that the power interruption state is determined by the power interruption determination means. Is. Thereby, even when a power interruption occurs, game information can be held. Therefore, even when the player returns from the power interruption, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the trouble that the game information must be input again.

  In the gaming machine B6, the storage means is provided in the timing means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B6, since the storage means is provided in the timing means, there is an effect that the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine B6 or B7, based on the fact that electric power is supplied to the gaming machine, a storage discriminating unit that discriminates whether or not the gaming information is stored in the storage unit, and the storage discriminating unit stores the gaming information. A gaming machine B8 having setting means for setting game information when it is determined that it is stored.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6 or B7, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that power is supplied to the gaming machine, a storage discriminating unit that discriminates whether or not the gaming information is stored in the storage unit, and the gaming discriminating unit stores the gaming information. And setting means for setting the game information when it is determined.

  Thereby, the player can set arbitrary game information. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which value (including data written on a magnetic card as well as premium spheres) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. In particular, the basic configuration of the slot machine is that it is equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, a medal or the like.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The identification information fluctuates due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 Frame button (part of input means)
64a First entrance (entrance)
64b Second entrance (entrance entrance)
81 3rd symbol display device (part of notification means)
S105 Information acquisition means S218 Special game establishment means S405 Part of the lottery means S1304 First special game selection means S1309 Second special game selection means S2003 Notification mode selection means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

The gaming machine pachinko machine or the like, after revealing the preset display mode, by passing the game ball in a predetermined region provided more on the game surface plate, those based on a predetermined region that has passed through the game ball lottery game of the type have been made or, gaming machines are known game is started those or in the type of person or a game that is the lottery.

Lottery ratio of type of the person or the game is different for each predetermined region provided with a plurality, of the plurality predetermined region is, one player selects any, to pass the game ball by the type of skilled or game has been proposed is intended to be lottery.

JP2013-233181A

However, among the predetermined region provided with a plurality, or passing game balls in which region, each time a player person or occurs, the player must think there is a problem that the game is difficult to understand .

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which a game is easy to understand.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 can acquire entry information when a game ball enters the entrance means capable of entering a game ball and the entrance means. Possible acquisition means, determination means for executing determination based on the entrance information acquired by the acquisition means, and the input information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination is executed by the determination means Storage means capable of storing, pre-discriminating means capable of discriminating the entrance information stored in the storage means before discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination means When the determination result is determined to be a predetermined determination result, a grant condition establishing means for establishing a grant condition for granting a privilege to the player, and a game ball when the grant condition is established by the grant condition establishing means Play in the first area that can pass The first area is different when the grant condition is established by the first decision means for determining the type of the privilege to be given to the player based on the passing of the ball and the grant condition establishment means. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second area, the second determination means for determining the type of the privilege to be given to the player, and the privilege determined by the first determination means or the second determination means. A bonus granting means for granting, and when the grant condition is established by the grant condition establishing means, the game ball is passed through either the first area or the second area. A notification mode determination unit that determines a notification mode for prompting a person based on predetermined setting information, and a notification unit that performs notification based on the notification mode determined by the notification mode determination unit, Said The determining means and the second determining means are set such that the ratios for determining the benefits advantageous to the player are different, and the notification mode determining means is pre-discriminated by the prior discriminating means. The notification mode is determined based on the result and the setting information .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1 , the entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the acquisition means capable of obtaining entry information when a game ball enters the entry means. , A determination unit that performs determination based on the entry information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the entry information acquired by the acquisition unit until the determination is performed by the determination unit Storage means, pre-discrimination means capable of discriminating before the discrimination means with respect to the entrance information stored in the storage means, and a discrimination result by the discrimination means is predetermined. When the determination result is satisfied, a grant condition establishing means for establishing a grant condition for granting a privilege to the player, and a game ball that can pass when the grant condition is satisfied by the grant condition establishing means. A game ball passed through one area Based on the first determination means for determining the type of the privilege to be given to the player, and when the grant condition is established by the grant condition establishment means, a second area different from the first area is played in the game ball A second determining unit that determines a type of the privilege to be given to the player based on the fact that the player has passed, and a privilege giving unit that grants the privilege determined by the first determining unit or the second determining unit; And when the grant condition is established by the grant condition establishment means, a notification for encouraging the player to pass the game ball to either the first area or the second area A notification mode determination unit that determines a mode based on predetermined setting information; and a notification unit that performs notification based on the notification mode determined by the notification mode determination unit. Said The determining means is set such that the ratio for determining the benefit that is advantageous to the player is different, and the notification mode determining means includes the prior determination result by the prior determination means, and the setting information. The notification mode is determined based on the above .

I I, there is an effect that can provide a more easy to understand the player to the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view inside a distribution unit. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a game information input screen when the cursor position is the game end time, and (b) is a game information input when the cursor position is set. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a screen. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed at the time of jackpot occurrence, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed at the time of the start of the navigation effect performed after a jackpot occurrence. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed in a navigation effect when it is the timing when a game ball passes a 1st gate in a distribution unit, (b) is a game ball in a distribution unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed in a navigation effect when it is a timing which passes 2nd gate. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect that is executed when the game end time arrives during execution of a navigation game, and (b) shows an example of an effect that is executed when the navigation game ends. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed when the information of a navigation game is backed up at the time of a power failure recovery, (b) is a schematic arrangement of the frame switch and the selection switch It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main controller. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot determination value. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table, and (d) is a judgment value per second random number counter C4 and a normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of these. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type based on the 1st gate. (B) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type based on the 2nd gate. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the determination value for the normal symbol, and (b) is a variation type counter CS1 and a variation type at the time of big hit (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of detachment (normal), (d) These are the schematic diagrams which showed typically the corresponding | compatible relationship between the fluctuation | variation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation | variation classification at the time of deviation (probability change). (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the navigation selection table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the game information storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the game information aggregation area, and (c) is an input It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the area | region typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the sensor detection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot classification determination process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the gate control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the data reading process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the navigation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the start difference ball calculation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the 1R difference ball calculation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the winning ball discrimination processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the out sphere discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the navigation game processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the navigation game setting process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the switch discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the upper switch process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the lower switch process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the right switch process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the left switch process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the navigation game end process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the extension confirmation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the navigation game continuation confirmation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the data storage process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the game information related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . (A) is the flowchart which showed the game information input start command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) showed the input screen update command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart. (A) is the flowchart which showed the game information input completion command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the game information input error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the shown flowchart. (A) is the flowchart which showed the game information input stop command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) shows the game extension confirmation command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart. (A) is the flowchart which showed the game continuation confirmation start command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the game continuation confirmation completion command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the shown flowchart. (A) is the flowchart which showed the game result display command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the jackpot command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a navigation type command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus, and (b) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the selection table for 1st gates in 2nd Embodiment, (b) shows typically the content of the selection table for 1st gates in the special figure 1. FIG. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 first gate selection table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the selection table for 2nd gates in 2nd Embodiment, (b) shows typically the content of the selection table for 2nd gates of special drawing 1 in FIG. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 second gate selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the navigation selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 big hit judgment processing which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the navigation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the distribution unit 650. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63 and 64, a distribution unit 650 having a first gate 650a and a second gate 650b, and the like can be attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Installed. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 and selection switches 270 (a) to (d) are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 and the selection switches 270 (a) to 270 (d), for example, input game information or produce effects on a game information input screen displayed on a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later. This is operated by the player when changing the stage of the game or changing the contents of the super reach.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. Various effects such as fluctuating effects and reach effects that accompany the entry to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (start winning prize), which will be described later, are themes given to each stage. Designed to be done together. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “street stage” → “ It is repeatedly changed in the order of “empty stage” → “island stage” → “city stage” →. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box” or “dollar box”) that receives the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. Is called. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64 a, the second entrance 64 b, the regular award 67, the distribution unit 650, the variable award device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion is on the back side of the inner frame 12. It is attached. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64a, the second winning port 64b, the normal winning port 67, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a, a special symbol 1 (one of the first symbols) is drawn, and the ball enters the second entrance 64b. In this case, a special symbol 2 (one of the first symbols) is drawn. A special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and when a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Thereafter, when the ball passes through the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b, the jackpot type is determined. Further, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, a position where the sphere passes through the first gate 650a and the sphere pass through the second gate 650b every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Switch to the position where you want to start. When the special symbol jackpot type is selected, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and at the same time, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses, or the ball Is released) and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times. As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. Although details will be described later, it is determined by a dedicated lottery when the ball passes through the first gate 650a and when the ball passes through the second gate 650b. When the ball passes through the first gate 650a, one of the big hit types is determined from the two types of “big hit A1” and “big hit A2”. When the ball passes through the second gate 650b, one of the big hit types is determined from the four types of “big hit B1,” “big hit B2,” “big hit C1,” and “big hit C2” (FIG. 15 (a ) To (b)). The specific winning opening 65a is opened as many times as the number of jackpot types. Further, after the end of the special gaming state, game value (game value) according to the jackpot type is given to the player as added value after the jackpot ends.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 64b. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 64b, and as a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  When the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, two types of jackpot types selected when the first gate 650a is passed are set as “jackpot A1” and “jackpot A2” (FIG. 15). (See (a)). Further, four types of jackpot types selected when passing through the second gate 650b are set as "big jackpot B1," "big jackpot C1," "big jackpot B2," and "big jackpot C2" (FIG. 15 ( b)). When one of the jackpot types is determined as “big jackpot A1,” “big jackpot A2,” “big jackpot B1,” “big jackpot B2,” “big jackpot C1,” or “big jackpot C2”, the number of rounds corresponding to each jackpot type Special game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, after the special symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed, the game ball passes through either the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b and the jackpot type is determined until the jackpot type is determined. The start is not executed.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started until the game ball passes through either the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed. If a game ball does not pass through the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b after a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), a big hit with a predetermined jackpot type or a jackpot type determined by lottery You may comprise so that a game may be started. Further, the right to execute the jackpot game may be extinguished.

  As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15B, specifically, the “big hit A1” is a big hit (10R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened 10 times, and the big hit game Later, a probability variation gaming state (high probability gaming state) in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability is awarded until the next jackpot. “Big jackpot A2” is a big jackpot (10R jackpot) where the specific winning opening (big open mouth) 65a is opened 10 times, and a short-time gaming state after the jackpot game (special symbol is low probability, normal symbol probability is high probability) Is set to 100 times as a period until the special symbol starts to fluctuate 100 times). “Big jackpot B1” is a big jackpot (4R jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened four times, and after the jackpot game, the probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability ( High probability game state) is awarded until the next jackpot. “Big jackpot B2” is a big jackpot (4R jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened four times, and a short-time gaming state after the jackpot game (special symbol is low probability, normal symbol probability is high probability) Is set to 100 times as a period until the special symbol starts to fluctuate 100 times as a period in which the opening time of the electric accessory becomes long and the number of times of opening is set to be large. “Big jackpot C1” is a big jackpot (16R jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened 16 times, and after the jackpot game, the probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability ( High probability game state) is awarded until the next jackpot. “Big jackpot C2” is a big jackpot (16R jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened 16 times, and a short-time gaming state after the jackpot game (special symbol is low probability, normal symbol probability is high probability) Is set to 100 times as a period until the special symbol starts to fluctuate 100 times). In addition, during “probable bonus game A1”, “big jackpot B1”, and “big jackpot C1”, a short-time game state of a normal symbol is also given during probability variation games. Further, the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set until 30 seconds elapses or until 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  Here, the “special symbol probability change gaming state (high probability state)” means a state where the special symbol jackpot probability has increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol probability change). It is a game state that is easily shifted to the game state. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is referred to as a “normal game state of a special symbol (low probability state)”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. The jackpot probability indicates a normal state (a normal state of a special symbol). In addition, the “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased, and the Riu electric character is a game ball provided along with the second entrance 64b. Is a game state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 64b. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. .

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, the short time period of the normal symbol and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the number of rounds at the jackpot according to the jackpot type Is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is set may be changed according to the type of jackpot. For example, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A1”, after the “Big Jack A1” is finished, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery is completed three times. "After the special symbol lottery is completed six times after the end, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued. When the" big hit C1 "is reached, the normal symbol is drawn until the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the" big hit C1 "ends. The short state may be continued at this time.

  Furthermore, instead of increasing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, the time to open the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the second entrance 64b or the electric symbol is released at one normal symbol hit. The number of times may be changed. Further, in this embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol short-time state”, but after the “special symbol high-probability state”, the “normal symbol short-time state” You may comprise so that it may become. Instead of the special symbol lottery count, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 650 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 640. FIG. Actually, a cover body is disposed on the front surface side, and the cover body is formed of a member through which the inside can be seen through, so that the inside can be viewed. In the present embodiment, the inside is a visible member, but the inside is not visible, and it may be configured so that it is not possible to know which is the state in which the inside is allocated by just looking at the sorting unit. Good. Thereby, a player's attention can be directed to the navigation display (for example, FIG. 8) which suggests which state is allocated to later.

  At the upper part of the sorting unit 640, there is provided a passage opening through which a game ball can enter. It is distributed to either the second entrance 650b. The sorting member 900 is switched every predetermined time between a position where the game ball is distributed to the first gate 650a and a position where the game ball is distributed to the second gate 650b. This switching operation is performed by energizing a solenoid (not shown) connected to the shaft of the sorting member 900 around the shaft (not shown) of the sorting member 900, which triggers the occurrence of a big hit. The switching operation is started, and the switching operation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereby, power consumption can be suppressed by switching the distribution member 900 only when it is necessary to enter the first gate 650a and the second gate 650b.

  Here, FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating a case where the sorting member 900 is stopped in a state of being tilted to the right position. In this case, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, the game ball is guided to the first gate 650a by the sorting member 900 tilted to the right position. FIG. 3B is a diagram illustrating a case where the sorting member 900 is stopped in a state of being tilted to the left position. In this case, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, the game ball is guided to the second gate 650b by the sorting member 900 tilted to the left position.

  The pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state” when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power. Thereafter, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and to the “time-short state of the normal symbol”. When the state shifts to the “high probability state of special symbol”, the state is continued from the end of the special symbol jackpot until the next special symbol lottery wins, regardless of the type of jackpot. When the next jackpot is not a probable jackpot (the jackpot A2, jackpot B2 or jackpot C2), the state returns to the “low probability state of special symbol”.

  In addition, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from the “normal symbol normal state” to the “normal symbol short-time state”, the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the special symbol jackpot ends. Will continue until. On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, the state returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”.

  If the special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, the “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further increased after the special symbol jackpot ends. It continues until the lottery ends 100 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “normal symbol short-time state”, when the new special symbol wins in the fifth special symbol lottery, the “ordinary symbol short-time state” further increases the new jackpot. It is continued until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the end. In other words, in the present embodiment, while the “ordinary symbol time-saving state” is continued, each time a new special symbol jackpot is reached, a short-term period (“ The duration of “short time state of normal symbol” is updated.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with the entry (start winning prize) to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is being executed. A variation display is performed, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state as a stop symbol after the variation ends, or the first entrance port 64a or the second entrance port 64b. The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the spheres that have entered the ball, is indicated by a lighting state.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64a while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the maximum number of times the ball is held is four times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81, and even when the ball enters the second entrance 64b, the number of entrances is a maximum of four times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that the entrance to the 1st entrance 64a and the 2nd entrance 64b could be suspended up to 4 times each, the maximum number of times of suspension was limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. The LED 37a is configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state of a special symbol) with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the light emission colors. And normal symbols, etc.). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A1, big hit A2, big hit B1, Special symbols (first symbol) corresponding to jackpot B2, jackpot C1, jackpot C2) are shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is jackpot A or jackpot B, all the numbers from “0” to “9” may be set regardless of the jackpot type. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect (pseudo-interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed during the big hit round in a predetermined period (special variation period) after the jackpot ends. Yes. In order to effectively perform this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured such that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type according to the type of main symbol displayed when the jackpot is won. In the case of a big hit C, a chance eye composed of “341” breaks is displayed. In this embodiment, the chance chance is one type of “341”, but is not limited to this, and it may be composed of other random eyes, or one of the reach misses may be set as the chance eye. Good.

  The change display of the special symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is not performed at the same time, and only one of them is performed. When the reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are respectively stored, the variation of the special symbol set as the priority is set based on the priority set in the gaming state. The In the present embodiment, in the gaming state other than the normal symbol is set to the short-time gaming state (the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state in which the short-time state is not set (100 times after the jackpot C)), the variation of the special symbol 1 Is preferentially executed. On the other hand, in the game state in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set, the variation of the special symbol 2 is executed with priority.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15A to 15B, the jackpot based on the passage of the first gate 650a is set so that only the jackpot of 10 rounds is selected, and the second gate 650b. The jackpot based on the passage of the four rounds is set so that the four-round jackpot is selected with a 50% probability and the 16-round jackpot is selected with a 50% probability. As the ratio of jackpots for shifting to the high probability gaming state, the jackpot based on the passage of the first gate 650a and the jackpot based on the passage of the second gate 650b are 50%, and are configured at the same ratio.

  Returning to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of reserved balls and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into left, middle, and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved sphere) among the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64a, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting it out.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64a while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the corresponding sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. Further, the reserved ball of the second entrance 64b is set in the same manner by using a number of retained balls different from that of the first entrance 64a.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the entrance to the 1st entrance 64a or the 2nd entrance 64b might be each hold | maintained up to 4 times, the maximum number of reserve balls is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, in place of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the four divided areas are different by the number of reserved balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls for the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed in accordance with the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is being executed, and ends the variation. As a later stop symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol and the symbol “×” are alternately turned on. Display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b operates for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the second entrance 64b. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times, like the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, but 3 times or less, or You may set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64a and a second entrance 64b through which a sphere can enter are disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64a, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws the special symbol 1 and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. Similarly, when the ball enters the second entrance 64b, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. As a result, the main controller 110 draws the special symbol 2 and the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b are also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. Although details will be described later, a winning ball which is the number of balls won in the switch reading process (S101) of the main controller 110 due to the turning on of the first entrance switch or the second entrance switch. The number and the number of acquired balls, which is the number of balls paid out as a winning ball, are stored in the winning detection information area 203m.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first and second entrances 64a and 64b, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (a large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. Yes. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed in the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed so as to become a big hit stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (five-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64a, 64b, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). In the ball discharge path (not shown), a transmission type out port sensor 66a that makes it possible to detect that a game ball has passed through the out port is disposed. Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the out port sensor 66a, an out ball detection command is output to the sound lamp control device 114 to notify that the game ball has passed through the out port 66. ing.

  In addition, the game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill.

  As shown in FIG. 4, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box Cut to the cover side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the game information input screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. In the following description, the case where the game end time is set to 21:00 and the target difference ball is set to 1000 balls at 19:00 (current time) will be described as an example. FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display at the time when the frame button 22 is pressed and the game information input screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 6 (a), “set”, “reset”, and “return” buttons are provided on the lower part of the third symbol display device 81 from the left. Fields for inputting “time” and “target difference ball” are provided, and a cursor is displayed in the time field of the game end time.

  Here, by depressing the upper switch 270a twice, the numerical value in the time column of the game end time is changed to 21. The numerical value changes from 19 to 20, 21 in accordance with the depression of the upper switch 270a. Next, the right switch 270b is pressed twice to move the cursor position to the 1000 position in the target difference column. Then, the target difference ball is changed to 1000 balls by pressing the upper switch once. Thereafter, when the right switch is pressed twice, the cursor position moves to the setting button, and the display changes to a display indicating that the setting button is being selected (FIG. 6B). By pressing the frame button 22 in this state, the game end time is set to 21:00 and the target difference ball is set to 1000 balls.

  Next, an example of navigation display when a jackpot occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. First, on the third symbol display device 81, a symbol that is a big hit is displayed, and when a big hit occurs, a display that suggests the occurrence of a big hit (FIG. 7A) is displayed, and a display that explains the method of starting the big hit game (FIG. 7B) is displayed. More specifically, an explanation that a jackpot game is started by passing a game ball through the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b is displayed, and the contents of the jackpot game obtained by each gate (for example, 10R) Etc.) is displayed. If game information has been input, an indication of which gate is recommended based on the game end time, target difference ball and current time of the game information (the left gate is recommended in FIG. 7B). ) Is displayed. Furthermore, when the time from the current time to the game end time is within a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes), the predicted difference ball number at the time of game end is displayed together with the contents of the jackpot game. This eliminates the need for the player to calculate the predicted difference ball at the end of the game, and allows the player to easily make a determination when selecting a gate.

  After the display (FIG. 7B) for explaining the method of starting the jackpot game is displayed, the navigation display suggesting which gate the game ball is guided to in the third symbol display device 81 Is displayed (FIGS. 8A to 8B). The distribution member 900 that distributes the game balls that have entered the distribution unit 640 to one of the gates is configured to switch positions at predetermined time intervals. FIG. 8A is a display that suggests that it is the timing at which the game ball that has entered the sorting unit 640 is guided to the first gate 650a, and the remaining time until the position of the sorting member 900 is switched, The five frames on the back of the “open” display at the bottom of the screen are displayed by turning on or off. Specifically, when the position of the sorting member 900 is switched to a position for guiding the sphere to the first gate 650a, all of the five frames are turned on, and the remaining time has elapsed 1/5 (in this embodiment, Every 1 second), the rightmost of the lit frames is turned off. When all the frames are turned off, the position of the sorting member 900 is switched. FIG. 8B shows a display suggesting that the game ball that has entered the sorting unit 640 is at the timing of being guided to the second gate 650b, and the remaining time is displayed in the same manner as described above.

  Next, an example of display when the game end time is reached will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the following description, the game end time is set to 21:00, the target difference ball is set to 1000 balls, and the case where the game is ended when the current time is 21:00 is described as an example. Do. When the current time is 21:00, which is the game end time, a display (FIG. 9A) indicating that it is the game end time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In FIG. 9A, in order to suggest that it is a game end time and to check whether or not to play a game by extending the game end time, “extend”, “ There is a button "Do not extend". In the initial state, the cursor is in a position of “do not extend” and the “do not extend” button is lit. The cursor position can be changed by pressing the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d. Next, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the cursor position is “not extended”, the game result is displayed (FIG. 9B). The game result displays the date and time of game play, game time, target difference ball, difference ball result, and the like. In addition, a comment based on the target difference ball and the difference ball result is displayed. If the frame button 22 is pressed while the cursor position is “extend”, a game information input screen (FIG. 6) is displayed. By newly entering game information, the game end time is extended and the game is played. Can continue.

  With reference to FIG. 10A, an example of display for selecting whether or not to continue the game using the game information stored in the backup area will be described. This display is displayed when the game information is input and when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the game information is stored in the backup area and the power is restored. In order to confirm whether or not to continue the game using the game information stored in the backup area, buttons “Continue” and “Do not continue” are provided at the bottom of the screen from the left. In the initial state, the cursor is in the position of “do not continue”, and the “do not continue” button is lit. The cursor position can be changed by pressing the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d, and can be selected by pressing the frame button 22. When “Continue” is selected, the navigation game is started with the game information stored in the backup area, and when “Do not continue” is selected, the navigation game is not started.

  FIG. 10B is a diagram schematically showing the frame button 22 and the selection switches 270 (a) to (d). An upper switch 270a is provided on the frame button 22, a right switch 270b on the right, a lower switch 270c on the lower side, and a left switch 270d on the left side. As described above, the frame button 22 and the selection switches 270 (a) to (d) are used to input game information on the game information input screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), It is operated by the player when changing the stage or changing the contents of the super reach.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second per-random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial-value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 35). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203 i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are synchronized with the timing of entering the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Each value is stored separately. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is a big jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot. The first random number table 202a is used for a special symbol with a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability (special with a high probability that the special symbol will be a big hit from the low probability. It is divided into two types: for a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the first random number table 202a (FIG. 14B) includes a first random number table 202a for a low probability and a first random number table 202 for a high probability. The number of random numbers included in the jackpot is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first per random number table 202a for the special symbol with a low probability and the first per random number table 202a for the special symbol with a high probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball has won the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per-random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0-2” is the first per-random number for the low probability. It is stored in the table 202a (see FIG. 14B). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that a special symbol jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0-29” is a first per-random number table 202a (FIG. ))). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “3/40”.

  In addition, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 14C). The first hit type selection table 202b includes a first gate selection table (FIG. 15 (a)) used when a sphere passes the first gate 650a after the big hit occurs, and the sphere passes the second gate 650b. There is a second gate selection table (FIG. 15B) used in this case, and the jackpot type is determined based on the first gate selection table or the second gate selection table. As shown in FIG. 15 (a), the jackpot type lottery result based on the passage of the first gate indicates that the jackpot type when the random value is “0 to 49” in the first hit type counter C2 is “big jackpot”. A1 ". The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot A2”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), the jackpot type lottery result based on the passage of the second gate is the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 24” in the first hit type counter C2. “Big hit B1”. The jackpot type when the value is “25 to 49” is “jackpot C1”. The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 74” is “big jackpot B2”, and the jackpot type when the value is “75 to 99” is “jackpot C2”.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), the stop type selection counter C3 returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, a range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random number range corresponding to the stop type of “completely off” is as low as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64a. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. Further, in the low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64a, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variation time refers to the time from the start of the variation of the special symbol until the symbol is stopped and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, when the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is fixed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). It is written as. Based on this variation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16B to 16D) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS1 is a counter value that is also acquired by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the variation starts.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16B to 16D), for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, “disconnect (for a long time)”, “disconnect (for a short time)”, “disconnect normal reach”. ”,“ Outgoing Super Reach ”,“ Outgoing Special Reach ”are defined, and variation patterns for jackpots are defined as“ Obtain Normal Reach ”,“ October Super Reach ”,“ October Special Reach ” Yes. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a big hit). Note that, as the variation time of the variation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is defined.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 16A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is When the value of the random number that is the winning set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 16A) matches, it is determined that the normal symbol is won. This second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that a special symbol jackpot is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64a is opened “only once for 0.2 seconds”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64a is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, you may open "0.5 second x 2 times".

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64a is opened “2 times per second”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64a is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64a. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C 4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64a is opened only “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 35), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 34) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. The special symbol 2 held ball counter 203e, the normal symbol held ball counter 203f, the probability changing flag 203g, the hour / short counter 203h, the pre-reading probability changing flag 203i, the counter buffer 203j, and the big hit flag 203k, It has a winning detection information storage area 203m, a gate time counter 203n, and other memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first entrance 64a (special symbol 1), and includes one execution area, four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and In these areas, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the area numbers (first to 4th) are stored in order from the smallest. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the older winning is stored in the area, and data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area (holding first area to holding third area) having a smaller area number. Done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64a (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, lottery drawing of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the special symbol 1 or The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize Then, various information (whether it is determined, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated).

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second entrance 64b (special symbol 2), and the first entrance 64a (special The only difference is that the symbol 1) is changed to the second entrance 64b (special symbol 2), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winnings stored in other reserved areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to a reserved area with a smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol (third symbol) that is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64a (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Every time a ball enters the first entrance 64a and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added (see S504 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 25).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 25 and S505 in FIG. 28). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number-of-holding balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and displays a hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls whenever the number of held balls changes. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the retained ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 64b (special symbol 2). This special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the first entrance (special symbol 1) is changed to the second entrance 64b (special symbol 2). However, since the other points are the same, the detailed description is omitted. Note that the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the processing of S510 in FIG. 28, and is subtracted by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 25). Further, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 25, S511 in FIG. 28). reference).

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol normal display (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes the normal entrance 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S804 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 30).

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (FIG. 31). S803: No).

  The probability changing flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability changing flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 If the value of the probability changing flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The probability changing flag 203g has an initial value set to zero. In the main controller 110, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed at the final round of the big hit (that is, the big hit end timing). ON or OFF is set according to the jackpot type. Specifically, “ON” is set for “big hit A1,” “big hit B1,” and “big hit C1”, and OFF is set for “big hit A2,” “big hit B2,” and “big hit C2.”

  When the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 27) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 26) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process, the value of the probability variation flag 203g is referred to. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is OFF, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the ordinary symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203h is set to zero. In the main controller 110, the timing for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the final round of jackpot A and jackpot B (that is, jackpot) A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set in (end timing). Specifically, 100 is set for all jackpot types. After that, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is finished until the value of the hour / middle counter 203h becomes 0 (S221 in FIG. 25).

  When the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second per random number table for the low probability (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 30).

  The pre-reading probability changing flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (special symbol high probability state) at the time of prefetching the lottery result (S603 or S604 in FIG. 29). If the value of the pre-reading probability changing flag 203i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state at the time of prefetching the lottery result. If the value of the pre-reading probability changing flag 203i is off, the lottery result This indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a special symbol (a low probability state of a special symbol) at the time of prefetching. The pre-reading probability changing flag 203i is set to an initial value of zero, and when the main controller 110 acquires a lottery result in the pre-reading process of the special symbol lottery result and the jackpot lottery result is acquired, On or off is set according to the jackpot type (S607 or S609 in FIG. 29). Specifically, “ON” is set for “big hit A1,” “big hit B1,” and “big hit C1”, and OFF is set for “big hit A2,” “big hit B2,” and “big hit C2.”

  When the start winning process (FIG. 28) is executed by the MPU 201 and it is determined that the game ball has newly won, the prefetch process (FIG. 29) is performed. In the pre-reading process, the value of the pre-reading probability changing flag 203i is referred to. If the value of the pre-reading probability changing flag 203i is OFF, the special symbol lottery result is pre-read based on the first per-random number table 202a for low probability.

  As described above, the counter buffer 203j is a buffer area used for counting each counter value.

  The jackpot flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203k is on, the position of the sorting member 900 is switched every predetermined time by the gate processing (FIG. 38) by the MPU 201, and the jackpot type determination processing (FIG. 36) by the MPU 201 The jackpot type is selected based on the game ball passing through the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b.

  The winning detection information storage area 203m includes the number of winning game balls (the number of winning balls) based on the winning of game balls in the general winning slot 63, the first winning slot 64a, and the second winning slot 64b. This is an area for storing the number of game balls (acquired ball number) that can be acquired in advance according to the winning opening. The winning detection information storage area 203m stores a value corresponding to a winning of a game ball detected in a switch reading process (S101) executed in the main controller 110 described later, and a sensor executed in the main controller 110. Based on the value stored in the detection process (S109), a winning ball detection command is set and the value is initialized.

  The gate time counter 203n is a counter for measuring a predetermined time for switching the position of the sorting member 900 for a predetermined time. The gate time counter 203n is incremented by 1 in a gate control process (S1402) executed in the main controller 110, which will be described later. When the value reaches 1250, it is initialized to 0 and the position of the distribution member 900 is changed. It is configured to switch. Here, since the gate control process (S1402) is executed every 4 ms, the sorting member 900 can be switched every 5 seconds.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with the ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 14A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 14A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. Yes.

  As described above, the first per-random number table 202a is a table in which the value of a random number that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first per random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (a first per random number table 202a for a low probability) and a special symbol high There is a table (first high random number table 202a for high probability) for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at the probability, and the number of random numbers that are a big hit included in each table is different. Yes. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  In the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14C), the first gate selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 15A) used based on the passage through the first gate 650a and the second gate 650b. A second gate selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 15B) used based on the passage is included. The first gate selection table 202b1 and the second gate selection table 202b2 are data tables in which determination values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are set for each jackpot type.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the first gate selection table 202b1 is set so that the jackpot A1 and the jackpot A2 can be selected, respectively. As the judgment value of the jackpot A1, the value “1” of the first hit type counter C2 is set. “0 to 49” is set as “50 to 99” as the determination value of the jackpot A2. Further, as shown in FIG. 15B, the second gate selection table 202b2 is set so that the big hit B1, the big hit B2, the big hit C1, and the big hit C2 can be selected, respectively. The value “0-24” of the hit type counter C2 is “25-49” as the judgment value of the jackpot B2, “50-74” is the judgment value of the jackpot C1, and “75-99” is the judgment value of the jackpot C2. "Is set for each.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 16A) is a data table in which the hit determination value for the normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 16A, when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is normal. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened for "0.2 seconds x once".

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the short time state of the normal symbol), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit when the value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 14D) is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 (d), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a dedicated jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 16 (b)) in the case where the success / failure determination result is a jackpot, and the success / failure determination. If the result is out of play and the game state is normal, a dedicated out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 16 (c)) and the result of the determination is out of control and the game state is probable game state. Each of them is configured at least by a use (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 16D). In addition, although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern selection table for a short-time gaming state is set.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various switches 208 include sensors (not shown) for detecting winning balls.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 pays out the winning balls one by one continuously. More specifically, every time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation), one prize ball is paid out. Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). Further, every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is paused for a predetermined period (1 second). Thereby, for example, when a large amount of prize balls need to be paid out, such as during a big hit, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 216 from paying out the prize balls without taking a break and to prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the pachinko machine 10 due to, for example, the resin portion or the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 being melted due to heat generated by the dispensing motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable part of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the part touched by the player such as the lower tray unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. This can be suppressed. Note that the number of payouts and the payout pause period until the payout motor 216 stops paying out the prize balls are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout motor 216 may be configured to pause payout every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out. For example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and variation pattern effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, selection switches 270 (a) to (d), RTC 260, and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. .

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, displays a game information input screen (FIG. 6) for inputting game information, The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect content at the time of super reach, and to the display control device 114. Instruct. When the game information input screen is displayed, a display game information input start command is transmitted to the display control device 114, and when the stage is changed, the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to display it, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors inputs from the selection switches 270 (a) to (d), and the selection switches 270 (a) to (d) are operated, for example, while the game information input screen (FIG. 6) is being displayed. When the selection switches 270 (a) to (d) are operated by the player while the necessary screen is displayed, a display input screen update command for updating the display of the game information input screen is displayed on the display control device. 114.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern table and a navigation selection table 222a. The variation pattern table is already well known and will be described briefly. However, based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough variation contents (variation time, variation type) indicated by the variation pattern command are described. (Reach, miss, etc.)) to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the navigation selection table 222a defines the navigation type to be selected depending on the number of remaining target rounds, whether or not the game time is at the end of the game, and whether or not there is a big hit in the hold. The remaining target round number is calculated from the target difference ball inputted in the game information, the value (P1) of the total driving ball counter 223i1 of the game information totaling area 223i, and the value (P2) of the total acquired ball counter 223i2. It is calculated by dividing the difference from the current difference ball number (P2-P1) by the 1R difference ball number, and whether or not the game time is at the end of the game is determined by the current time storage area 223q. It is determined whether or not the time from the current time, which is the data of the game, to the game end time, which is the data of the game information storage area 223h, is within a predetermined time (within 30 minutes in the present embodiment). Whether or not there is a jackpot depends on whether or not there is winning information that will be a jackpot in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 in the winning information storage area 223a. It is those determined.

  If the number of remaining target rounds is less than or equal to 0 (that is, the current number of difference balls exceeds the target difference ball), whether or not the game is at the end of the game The navigation type A that is a display that leaves the selection to the player (that is, does not display which gate is recommended) is selected. This is because the target difference ball is already exceeded, and the target difference ball is reached (reached) regardless of which gate is selected.

  When the remaining target number of rounds is 1 to 4, the navigation type B which is a display recommending the second gate 650b is selected regardless of whether the game is at the end of the game or whether there is a big hit in the hold. The This is because the jackpot type selected by passing the game ball through the second gate 650b is B1, B2 which is a big hit of 4 rounds, or C1, C2 which is a big hit of 16 rounds, so which jackpot type is selected. This is because even if it is done, the target difference ball can be reached.

  When the remaining target round number is 5 to 10 and there is no big hit in the hold, the navigation type C which is a display recommending the first gate 650a is selected regardless of whether or not the game is in the final stage. On the other hand, when there is a big hit in the hold, the navigation type B that is a display recommending the second gate 650b is selected regardless of whether or not the game is in the final stage. This is because the jackpot type selected by the game ball passing through the first gate 650a is A1 and A2 which are jackpots of 10 rounds, so that regardless of which jackpot type is selected, the target difference ball is reached. Because it can be done. In addition, when there is a big hit in the hold, even if the game ball is passed through the second gate 650b and B1 or B2 which is a big hit in four rounds is selected, the game ball is put in the first gate 650a in the big hit in the hold. This is because the target difference ball can be reached by passing. The second gate 650b, which may not reach the target difference first when there is a big hit in the hold, is recommended because the target difference is reached in the selection of the big hit type of the second gate 650b. Even if the four-round jackpot types B1 and B2 are selected and the player wakes up, it will be possible to produce a jackpot that is unexpected for the player, and improve the player's interest Because it can. However, in the present embodiment, the second gate 650b that may not reach the target difference first is recommended when there is a big hit in the hold. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it recommend the 1st gate 650a which reaches a difference ball. Thereby, anxiety that the target difference may not be reached can be removed earlier than in the present embodiment, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  When the remaining target round number is 11 to 14, the reservation is not a big hit, and the game is not at the end of the game, the navigation type C which is a display recommending the first gate 650a is selected. The purpose of this is to steadily approach the target difference ball because the game time still remains until the game end time. On the other hand, when there is a big hit in the hold or at the end of the game, the navigation type B that is a display recommending the second gate 650b is selected. This is not the end of the game, but if there is a big hit in the hold, even if the game ball is passed through the second gate 650b and B1 or B2, which is a big hit in four rounds, is selected, This is because the target difference ball can be reached by passing the game ball through one gate 650a. The second gate 650b, which may not reach the target difference first when there is a big hit in the hold, is recommended because the target difference is reached in the selection of the big hit type of the second gate 650b. Even if the four-round jackpot types B1 and B2 are selected and the player wakes up, it will be possible to produce a jackpot that is unexpected for the player, and improve the player's interest Because it can. Also, when the game is at the end of the game, the game time is not enough and it is necessary to reach the target difference in this jackpot game, so the target difference is reached in this jackpot game (16 rounds). The second gate 650b is recommended, which is a possibility that the jackpot game will be selected).

  When the remaining target round number is 15 to 16 and it is not the end of the game, the navigation type C which is a display recommending the first gate 650a is selected regardless of whether or not there is a big hit in the hold. This is because the game time still remains until the game end time, so it aims to steadily approach the target difference ball. If there is a hold, by selecting the first gate 650a even in the hold jackpot This is because the target difference ball can be reached. On the other hand, when the game is in the final stage, there is not enough game time left and it is necessary to reach the target difference in this jackpot game, so the target difference is reached in this jackpot game (16 rounds). The second gate 650b, which is likely to be a jackpot game), is recommended.

  When the remaining target round number is 17 or more and it is not the end of the game, the navigation type C which is a display recommending the first gate 650a is selected regardless of whether there is a big hit in the hold. The purpose of this is to steadily approach the target difference ball because the game time still remains until the game end time. On the other hand, when the game is in the final stage, there is not enough game time left and it is necessary to reach the target difference in this jackpot game, so the target difference is reached in this jackpot game (16 rounds). The second gate 650b, which is likely to be a jackpot game), is recommended.

  As described above, the navigation selection table 222a should be appropriately designed according to the game value obtained in the jackpot game, and is not limited to the contents described above. Further, when a plurality of jackpots are included in the hold, a separate table may be prepared and defined. Thereby, the navigation display for reaching the target difference ball can be selected with higher accuracy. Further, information on the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b selected by the player when the jackpot is generated may be recorded, and the contents of the table may be changed based on the recorded information.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and a variation start flag 223d. Stop type selection flag 223e, game information input flag 223f, button effect prohibition flag 223g, game information storage area 223h, game information total area 223i, navigation game flag 223j, extension confirmation flag 223k, continuation confirmation flag 223m, continuation confirmation in progress At least a flag 223n, a cursor position storage area 223p, a current time storage area 223q, an input area 223r, a power-off flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (the first area to the fourth area for the special symbol 1 and the first area to the fourth area for the special symbol 2). In each of these areas, winning information is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information includes an area number among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area) of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. It is stored in order from the (first to fourth) small areas. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls on hold (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuating effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64a, or in main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1607 in FIG. 36). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the stored special symbol 1 held ball number. In order to notify the value of the counter 223 b to the display control device 114, a display reservation ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, has a maximum number of four reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the special symbol 2 held in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts up to once. The number of reserved balls is added to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b by entering the second entrance 64b, and is different from the display of the reserved ball number symbol of the special symbol 1 on the third symbol display device 81. Since it is different only in the point used for the display of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 and others are the same, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the main controller 110. Can be changed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 42), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3702 in FIG. 60). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 42), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3707 in FIG. 60). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The game information input flag 223f and the button effect prohibition flag 223g are set to off in the initial state. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the game information input screen can be displayed (period in which the frame button 22 or the effects required for the operation of the selection switches 270 (a) to (d) are not displayed), (S2704 in FIG. 50), a game information input screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2705 in FIG. 50). When this game information input flag 223f is set to ON, processing based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the selection switches 270 (a) to (d) corresponding to the displayed game information input screen is executed. (S2701 in FIG. 50: Yes). Further, when the button effect prohibition flag 223g is set to ON, the effect that requires pressing the frame button is not displayed while the game information input screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . When the frame button is pressed when the cursor position is set, reset, or returned on the game information input screen, the display of the game information input screen is terminated and set to off (FIG. 56). S3314). As a result, an effect necessary to press the frame button is displayed, and processing based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the selection switches 270 (a) to (d) corresponding to the effect can be performed. . In the present embodiment, the game information input flag is used when it is desired not to display the effects required for the operation of the frame button 22 or the selection switches 270 (a) to (d) except during the display of the game information input screen. 223f and the button effect prohibition flag 223g are prepared separately, so that the button effect prohibition flag 223g is set to be turned on / off, so that it has a highly expandable configuration. In such a case, it may be configured such that an effect necessary to operate the frame button 22 or the selection switches 270 (a) to 270 (d) is not displayed. Thereby, the button effect prohibition flag 223g can be made unnecessary, and the area of the RAM 223 can be saved.

  The game information storage area 223h includes a game time storage area 223h1 and a target difference ball storage area 223h2, and stores game information (game end time, target difference ball) input on the game information input screen (FIG. 6) described above. In order to determine the display mode of the navigation display (FIG. 8) (S2106 or S2108 in FIG. 44), determine whether the game is at the end (S2105 in FIG. 44), or determine the end of the game. This is an area used for (S3404 in FIG. 57). In the initial state, the game end time, which is data in the game time storage area 223h1, is set to 0:00, and the target difference ball, which is data in the target difference ball storage area 223h2, is set to 0 balls. In the game information input screen (FIG. 6), if the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is set and no error occurs (eg, the game end time is before the current time), the game time storage area 223h1 is displayed. A game end time is set in the target difference ball storage area 223h2. The game time storage area 223h1 and the target difference ball storage area 223h2 are initialized when the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is extended on the above-described game extension confirmation screen (FIG. 9A). (S3512 in FIG. 58). In addition, the game information input screen (FIG. 6) is also initialized when the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is reset (S3309 in FIG. 56). Thereby, when the game end time has arrived or when the player voluntarily ends the game, the game information can be initialized, and then the game information that has been input by another player who plays the game. Can never be referenced.

  The game information totaling area 223i includes a total driving ball counter 223i1, a total acquired ball counter 223i2, a start difference ball storage area 223i3, and a 1R difference ball storage area 223i4. The total number of shots counter 223i1 indicates the total number of balls (total number of shots) that the player has struck to the front of the game board 13 after the game information is input, and the total number of shots counter 223i2 , The total number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) acquired by the player since the game information is input is indicated in the start difference ball storage area 223i3 as the total number of hit balls at the start of the jackpot game. In the 1R difference ball storage area 223i4, the number of balls acquired per 1R substantially obtained in the previous jackpot game is stored.

  The total number of hit balls 223i1 is based on the game balls entering the general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64a, the second winning hole 64b, the special winning hole 65a, the out hole 66 or the normal winning hole 67. When the winning ball detection command or the out ball detection command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, it is updated (S2402 in FIG. 47, S2502 in FIG. 48). The value of the total pitched ball number counter 223i1 is a calculation of the remaining target round number which is information for selecting the type of navigation display (S2104 in FIG. 44), and the game end displayed in the navigation display (FIG. 8). It is used for calculation of the number of predicted difference balls at the time (S2109 in FIG. 44).

  The total winning ball number counter 223i2 is based on the main control device based on the game balls entering the general winning port 63, the first winning port 64a, the second winning port 64b, the special winning port 65a, or the normal winning port 67. When the winning ball detection command transmitted from 110 is received, it is updated (S2402 in FIG. 47). The value of the total acquired ball number counter 223i2 is calculated based on the calculation of the remaining target round number (S2104 in FIG. 44), which is information for selecting the type of navigation display, and the game end time displayed in the navigation display (FIG. 8). It is used for calculation of the number of predicted difference balls at the time (S2109 in FIG. 44).

  The start difference ball storage area 223i3 stores the number of difference balls between the total number of hit balls and the total number of acquired balls when the big hit game is started (S2202 in FIG. 45). The value of the start difference ball storage area 223i3 is referred to when the jackpot game is ended, and is used to calculate the number of balls substantially acquired by the player in the jackpot game (S2303 in FIG. 46).

  The 1R difference ball storage area 223i4 shows the difference between the difference between the total number of hit balls and the total number of acquired balls and the difference in the start difference ball storage area 223i3 described above when the big hit game is terminated. The value divided by the number of rounds is stored (S2303 in FIG. 46). Thereby, the average value of the number of acquired balls substantially obtained in one round of the jackpot game can be calculated. By using this value, the number of acquired balls that the player can actually obtain for the calculation of the predicted difference ball number (S2109 in FIG. 44) at the game end time displayed in the navigation display (FIG. 8) described above. Since the number of game balls actually obtained by the player is smaller than the displayed predicted difference ball number, dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced. Similarly, in the calculation of the remaining target round number (S2104 in FIG. 44), which is information for selecting the type of navigation display, since it can be calculated with the number of acquired balls that the player can actually obtain, for example, navigation Even if a jackpot game (10R) based on the passage of the first gate 650a in the display is acquired, the first gate is obtained when the number of acquired balls that the player can actually obtain does not reach the target difference ball at the end of the game. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied without reaching the target difference ball even though the player has played the game in accordance with the navigation display without being displayed to recommend 650a.

  The navigation game flag 223j is a flag for setting whether to execute a navigation game, which is executed based on the game information input on the above-described game information input screen, and the initial value is set to off. . The navigation game flag 223j is set to ON when the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is set on the game information input screen and no error occurs (the input game end time is earlier than the current time). (S3304 in FIG. 56). When the navigation game flag 223j is set to ON, the game information storage area is initialized by pressing the frame button 22 when the cursor position is reset on the game information input screen (FIG. 56). S3308: Yes), the navigation game end process is executed in the navigation game process (S1811 in FIG. 49) in the voice lamp control device 113 (S2604: Yes in FIG. 49), and the power-off command is issued in the voice lamp control device 113. In the data storage process (S3817 in FIG. 61), which is a process when the game is received, information related to the navigation game (information in the current time storage area 223q, game information storage area 223h, game information totaling area 223i) is stored in the other registers of the RTC 260. 263b (SS3802 in FIG. 61) Yes).

  The extension confirmation flag 223k displays the game extension confirmation screen (FIG. 9 (a)) when the game information is inputted and the navigation game is being executed and the current time becomes the inputted game end time. 3 is displayed on the symbol display device 81, suggesting that it is a game end time to the player, and is used for confirming whether or not to play a game by extending the game end time. Is set to off. This extension confirmation flag 223k is set to ON when the game information is input and the navigation game is being executed and the current time becomes the input game end time (S3405 in FIG. 57). . When the extension confirmation flag 223k is set to ON, the extension confirmation process is executed in the sound lamp control process 113 (S3402 of FIG. 57: Yes). Thereafter, in the extension confirmation process, when the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is extended or not extended, the process corresponding to the button at the cursor position is performed, and the extension confirmation flag 223k is set. Set to off. As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player that the input game end time has arrived, and the player can extend the game after recognizing that the game end time is predetermined by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game end time from elapses due to the game being too enthusiastic. In this embodiment, the game extension confirmation screen is displayed and the player is selected to extend or not extend. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game end time has elapsed, the game result is automatically set. May be displayed to end the navigation game, or a display indicating that the game end time has arrived may be displayed to the player, or the game end time is automatically extended (for example, 30 minutes). ) Thereby, the operation burden on the player can be reduced, and the player can concentrate on the game.

  The continuation confirmation flag 223m and the continuation confirmation flag 223n are game continuation confirmation screens for confirming whether or not the information related to the navigation game stored at the time of the power interruption is continuously used when the power is restored from the power interruption. (FIG. 10A) is used for display, and both are set to OFF in the initial state. This continuation confirmation flag 223m is used to store the game information data stored in the other register 263b of the RTC 260 in the data reading process (S1610 of FIG. 40) in the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113, in the game information storage area 223h. And when stored in the game information totaling area 223i, it is set to ON (S1705 in FIG. 40). When the continuation confirmation flag 223m is set to ON, the game continuation confirmation screen (FIG. 10 (a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the navigation game process (FIG. 49) of the sound lamp control device 113. The game continuation confirmation start command for display and the continuation confirmation flag 223n for executing the processing based on the switch operation when the game continuation confirmation screen is displayed are set to ON (S2606 in FIG. 49). : Yes). When the display game continuation confirmation start command is set and the continuation confirmation flag 223n is set (on setting), the continuation confirmation flag 223m is set to off (S2606: Yes in FIG. 49).

  When this continuation confirmation flag 223m is set to ON, the navigation system continuation confirmation process for performing processing based on the switch operation while the game continuation confirmation screen is displayed is executed in the audio lamp control device 113 (FIG. 49). S2609: Yes). If the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is extended or not extended by this navigation game continuation confirmation process, the process corresponding to the button at the cursor position is executed, and the continuation confirmation flag 223n is set off. (S3616 in FIG. 59). As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player that the information related to the navigation game stored at the time of the power interruption is continuously available when the power is restored from the power interruption. When the player is switched, it is possible to prevent the game from being started with the game information of another person by selecting not to continue.

  The cursor position storage area 223p is a region that is currently selected or input on the game information input screen (FIG. 6), the game extension confirmation screen (FIG. 9A), or the game continuation confirmation screen (FIG. 10A). It is used to indicate where it is, and the initial state on the game information input screen (FIG. 6) is the position of time 1 of the game end time, and the game extension confirmation screen (FIG. 9 (a)) The initial state at is a position where it is not extended, and the initial state on the game continuation confirmation screen (FIG. 10A) is a position where it is not continued. The cursor position storage area 223p is displayed on the right switch 270b or the left switch on the game information input screen (FIG. 6), the game extension confirmation screen (FIG. 9 (a)) or the game continuation confirmation screen (FIG. 10 (a)). It is changed by pressing 270d. Specifically, for example, in the game extension confirmation screen (FIG. 9A), when the cursor position is not extended, the cursor position is extended when the left switch 270d is pressed. When the cursor position is changed to the position and the cursor position is not extended, the non-extend button that was lit is turned off, and the extend button is lit, so it is visually confirmed that the cursor position has moved to extend. Can be recognized.

  The current time storage area 223q acquires and stores the current time of the time register 263a of the RTC 260 connected to the sound lamp control device 113 via the input / output port 205, and the time of the input game information is an error. This is a region referred to for determination (S3302 in FIG. 56) whether it is (before the current time), determination of whether the game end time has arrived (S3404 in FIG. 57), and the like. This current time storage area 223q stores the date and time information of the time register 263a of the RTC 260 in the navigation game process (FIG. 49) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2601 in FIG. 49). As a result, since the RTC 260 is provided with the backup power source 264, the correct current time can be obtained even when the power is cut off and the game end time has arrived in the navigation game. Whether or not can be accurately determined. In this embodiment, the time information by the RTC 260 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game time during which the navigation game is executed is measured by a process having a timer function separately, not the game end time. The game time may be input, and it may be determined whether or not the game time has elapsed. Thereby, the RTC 260 can be dispensed with, and the cost can be reduced.

  The input area 223r is an area for temporarily storing game information input on the game information input screen (FIG. 6). In this input area 223r, a time 1 input area 223r1 for storing time unit data of the game end time, a time 2 input area 223r2 for storing data of 10 minutes unit of the game end time, and the target difference ball A difference ball 1 input area 223r3 for inputting data of 1000 ball units and a difference ball 2 input area 223r4 for setting data of 1009 units of target difference balls are provided. In the input area 223r, the cursor position is set to the game end time or the target in the switch determination process (FIG. 51) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the switch operation during display of the game information input screen (FIG. 6). If it is a difference ball, it is updated by pressing the upper switch 270a or the lower switch 270c (S2903, S2907, S2911, S2915 in FIG. 52, S3003, S3007, S3011, S3015 in FIG. 53). Based on the value in the input area 223r, a display input screen update command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, thereby updating the display of the game information input screen (FIG. 6). be able to. When the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is set on the game information input screen, the value of the input area 223r is saved in the game information storage area 223h and then initialized (S3303 in FIG. 56). When the frame button 22 is pressed when the cursor position is reset or returned, initialization is performed (S3309 or S3312 in FIG. 56). Here, in this embodiment, when the game information input screen (FIG. 6) is displayed, the current time information in the current time storage area 223q is stored in the time 1 input area 223r1 and the time 2 input area 223r2 of the input area 223r. It is configured to display after setting (S2705 in FIG. 50). Thus, since the game end time is input after the current time, the number of operations for the player to input the game end time rather than the setting start being 0:00. Can be reduced.

  The power-off flag 223y is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 when the main controller 110 detects power-off, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y is turned on. Data storage processing and power-off processing are executed (S1817 and S1818 in FIG. 41). Then, in the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 39), when the power-off flag 223y is on, the RAM work area is cleared and the data reading process is executed, and the power-off flag 223y is set off. (S1609 to S1611 in FIG. 39). As a result, the game information saved by the data storage process at the time of power interruption can be reused by the data reading process at the start-up process at the time of power restoration, and the navigation game is continuously executed. be able to.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 28) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The RTC 260 is an integrated circuit (IC) for measuring a time called a real time clock, and is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 via an input / output port. The RTC 260 includes an MPU 262 for measuring time, a register 263 for storing time information, and a backup power source 264. The register 263 is provided with a time register 263a for storing the date and current time measured by the MPU 262, and another register 264b. The backup power supply 264 is connected to the MPU 262 and the register 263. Therefore, the MPU 262 can continue timing even after the gaming machine is turned off by the backup power source 264, and the information stored in the register is kept. In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off, the information of the game information storage area 223h and the game information totaling area 223i of the RAM of the sound lamp control device 113 is stored in the other register 264b, thereby recovering from the power cut. In addition, the navigation game can be continuously executed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect.

  Here, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbols and the number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol. Since there are models with the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce costs.

  Below, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. After that, it takes a long time to output data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also reads and writes data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Execute data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND type flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for starting up the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. Note that the number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code at the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled in the boot program are read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified in reading the data of the first page. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a and stored.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the end of the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 34) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 23) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 64B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  As a result, after the transfer of image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  Further, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. A period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64a or the second entrance is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when entry to 64b is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S3903 and S3904 in FIG. 62).

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the back A corresponding to the “city stage”, the back B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and the back C corresponding to the “island stage”) are all shown in the third symbol display device. 81. The image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed in 81, and the image controller 237 displays the rear image on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling from left to right in the horizontal direction. Is drawn. As a result, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area in which the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 is in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to produce a change after the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b has been entered. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not immediately started.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data that is resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a predetermined sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the frame buffers of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. Then, it is possible to read out the image of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image of one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame 20 milliseconds after completion of the drawing process for the image for one frame. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By designating them alternately, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to displays related to related commands, displays related to jackpot related commands, round effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the discontinuation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If the jackpot is one of the jackpots C, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the short time period of this normal symbol, the greater the chance that the ball will pass through the normal entrance 67, so there will be more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and there will also be more opportunities to hit the normal symbol. . Therefore, since the chance to release the electric combination due to the big winning of the normal symbol increases, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 64b, and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, since the second entrance 64b is a winning entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters the second entrance. As it becomes easier to enter the ball opening 64b, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or the number of possessed balls is not decreased even when a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the ending effect, the player may make a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol held by notifying that the lottery result of one of the lotteries of the special symbol held will be a big win of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that a game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the display related to the game information related command, the display related to the jackpot related command, the round effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change starts until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. As a result, the fluctuating effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by main controller 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 is displayed in the third symbol. It is possible to specify the third symbol to be easily displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to each of the three symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the 3rd symbol is being displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop effect of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 21) "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The content of the image to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the production mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 22 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (the address “0002H” in FIG. 22 is applicable).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233 f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S3905 in FIG. 62). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S6705 in FIG. 80 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S4201 in FIG. 64B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S4208 in FIG. 64B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 64B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 64 (b) S4209) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 65 to 76) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 77 to 79) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6601 in FIG. 80A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 23) described below describing the contents of image drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 77 (b) ) (See S4203)), a pointer update process (see S6305 in FIG. 79) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 23), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 16, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Character 1, Effect 2, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol display display). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be arranged on the most back side, and the last drawn sprite can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production time of effects displayed based on the display data table in accordance with the storage of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 64 (b) The time counter 233h is decremented by 1 each time the display setting process (see) is executed (see S6307 in FIG. 77). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be executed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 81) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the MPU 231 It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6813 in FIG. 81). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6814 in FIG. 81). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6902 in FIG. 82).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 64B) is executed (see S6902 in FIG. 82).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame 20 milliseconds after completion of the drawing process for the image for one frame. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By designating them alternately, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored in the winning detection information storage area 203m.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64a is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the through gate passing process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and then the sensor detection process is executed (S109). The sensor detection process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S110), and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the change in the special symbol 2) Display suspension number N2) is acquired (S203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is a variable sphere holding ball in the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0. If it is determined (S204: No), it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1). ) Is determined to be 0 (S209: No), it is determined that there is no fluctuating display holding ball in the special symbol, and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205). ), A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the hold first area → execution area, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is determined to be 0 (S204: No), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is determined to be greater than 0. (S209: Yes), the same process as the process for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 described above is performed for the reserved ball of the special symbol 1. The special symbol 1 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If S has not passed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the change time of the change display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 26 or a special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol 2 variation start process or the special symbol 1 variation start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Thus, the stop symbol of special symbol 2 or special symbol 1 is set.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the process of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol display (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether the symbol is a big hit (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON (S218), a jackpot command is set (S219), and the process proceeds to S222.

  The jackpot type is selected by the passage of the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b in the jackpot type determination process of the main process described later by the jackpot flag 203k set to ON in the process of S218. A specific description will be given in the jackpot type determination process (FIG. 36) described later.

  Also, the jackpot command set in the process of S219 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) described later is executed by the MPU 201. Among them, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot command, it transmits the display jackpot command to the display control device 114 (see S2002 in FIG. 43) and displays the navigation type command for display by the navigation process (S2003 in FIG. 43). Is transmitted to the display control device 114. Thereby, a display (FIG. 7A) that suggests the occurrence of a jackpot is displayed, and a display that prompts the player to enter the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b (FIGS. 7B and 8). Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S217, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S220). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S220: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S221), and the process proceeds to S222. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour / middle counter 203h is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped and the process proceeds to S222.

  In the process of S222 executed after the process of S219 or S221, the lighting of the LED which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S216 and the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81 are performed. A stop command is set to synchronize (S222).

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S208). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 2 variation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 of the special symbol 2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Each value is acquired (S301). Next, in order to determine whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by the processing of S301 is a big win of the special symbol 2, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S302). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203g is on (greater than 0).

  When it is determined that the probability changing flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), a lottery result as to whether or not the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a is acquired ( The process proceeds to S303) and S305. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per-random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value (FIG. 14B) at the time of high probability in the first per-random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S303). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “30 to 399”, it is determined that it is out (see FIG. 14B). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability changing flag 203g is not on (S302: No), a lottery result indicating whether or not the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot determination value at the low probability of the first hit random number table 202a is acquired. (S304), the process proceeds to S305. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value (FIG. 14B) at the low probability of the first random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S304). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 2”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “3 to 399”, it is determined that it is out (see FIG. 14B). ).

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S303 or S304 is a jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 is a jackpot (S305: Yes), the jackpot Is set (S306). In the processing of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the jackpot symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the processing of S301. The stop type to be displayed is determined. For example, as the stop type, “front / rear out of reach”, “reach other than front / rear out of reach”, “complete out of reach”, and the like are defined.

  Next, in the process of S307, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the display mode set in the process of S306. Further, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S307). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203j of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 16B) of the variation pattern selection table 202d. Specifically, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0-50”, the normal reach is in the range of “51-179”, the super reach is in the range of “51-179”, and the special reach is in the range of “180-198”. A variation pattern is determined (see FIG. 16B).

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 is out (S305: No), the display mode of out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. The stop type to be displayed is determined. For example, as the stop type, “front / rear out of reach”, “reach other than front / rear out of reach”, “complete out of reach”, and the like are defined.

  Next, a deviation pattern is determined based on the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d or the fluctuation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation) 202d3 (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203j of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and fluctuations in symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the time.

  When the processing of S307 or S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1201 of the main processing (FIG. 35). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, the same process as the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) is performed for the special symbol 1. Data of the execution area in the reserved ball storage area of the special symbol 1 is acquired by the processing of S401, and then the same processing as the processing in the special symbol 2 variation start processing (S208) is performed. The specific contents are the same as the processing in the special symbol 2 variation start processing (S208), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64a. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64a (start winning prize) (S501). Here, a ball entering the first ball inlet 64a is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64a (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S503).

  If there is no winning at the first entrance 64a (S501: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4. If not less (S503: No), the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64a (S501: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S505).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S505, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are acquired, and the special The pattern 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area (S506), and the process proceeds to S507.

  In the process of S507, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 64b (S507). If it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 64b (S507: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is processed in the same manner as when the first entrance 64a is won.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S508), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) ( S509: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S510), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S511). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type counter C3 are acquired, stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area (S512), and the process proceeds to S513.

  If there is no winning at the second entrance 64b (S507: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 64b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is less than 4. If not (S509: No), the process proceeds to S513.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 29, the prefetching process of S513 is demonstrated. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process (S513). This prefetch process (S513) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 28).

  In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S601). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S601: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the change is pre-reading probability change (S602). ), If the game state is in the pre-reading probability change (S602: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first random number table 202a (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Here, the determination in the process of S603 is performed in the same manner as the process of S303 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 26).

  On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the gaming state is not in the pre-reading probability change (S602: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the low probability of the first random number table 202a (S604), Move on to processing. Here, the determination in the process of S604 is performed in the same manner as the process of S304 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 26).

  Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result determined in S603 or S604 is set (S605). The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts a lottery result from the winning information command, and stores this information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a for use in navigation processing or the like. .

  After the winning information command is set by the processing of S605, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination result determined in S603 or S604 is a probability variation jackpot of the special symbol (S606). Here, whether or not it is a probable big hit is determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the processing of S506 or S512 of the start winning process (FIG. 28). Specifically, the jackpot type selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2 is the jackpot A1 selected when passing through the first gate 650a, or the jackpot B1 or jackpot C1 selected when passing through the second gate 650b. If it is either of these, it will be a promising jackpot. The jackpot type and the value of the first type counter C2 are defined by the first hit type selection table 202b. The jackpot A1 selected when passing through the first gate 650a is set to "0 to 0". 49 ”(FIG. 15A), the big hit B1 or big hit C1 selected when passing through the second gate 650b is selected when the first hit type counter C2 is“ 0 to 49 ”( Accordingly, when the value of the first hit type counter C <b> 2 is “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a probable big hit.

  When it is determined by the process of S606 that the probability change is a big hit (S606: Yes), the pre-reading probability changing flag 203i is set to ON (1) (S607), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined by the processing of S606 that the probability variation is not a big hit (S606: No), it is determined whether or not the time is a big win (S608). In the present embodiment, since all jackpots that are not probable jackpots are time bonuses, it can be determined that the jackpot is a jackpot if the lottery result is a jackpot and not a promising jackpot.

  If it is determined in the processing of S608 that the time has been saved (S608: Yes), the prefetching probability changing flag 203i is set to off (S609). On the other hand, when the lottery result is out of the special symbol (S608: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64a. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64a is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S701: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the hold first area → execution area, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h of the RAM 203 is greater than 0 (S708). The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol hour / hour state. If the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S708: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is normal. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S708: No), it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S709). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first inlet 64a is released. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64a as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64a, the first winning opening 65a is limited even if the first winning opening 64a is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64a during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the entrance 64a. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64a becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second per-random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 16A).

  In the process of S708, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the processing of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 is low. Based on the second per random number table for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 16A).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S710 or S711 is a normal symbol win (S712), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S712: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S713). In the processing of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714), and when it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714: Yes), the current present is the special symbol. It is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S715). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64a as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where it is out of the normal symbol In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S715, if the special symbol is not big hit (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64a is set to 1 second, the number of opening times is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S714, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64a is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S712, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S712: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S718). In the processing of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719), and if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case of low probability of normal symbols, Since the release period of the first entrance 64a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64a.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set in advance by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S722 (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1207) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S713 or S718.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol win when the second symbol display device 83 starts the variation display being executed. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64a is set (S725), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S725, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1205) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S803: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, a sensor detection process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the sensor detection process (S109). This sensor detection process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) and is set in the switch reading process (S101) executed in the timer interrupt process. This is a process for transmitting a winning ball detection command or an out ball detection command to the sound lamp control device 113 based on the information in the storage area 203m based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the out port.

  In the sensor detection process, first, it is determined whether there is information in the winning detection information storage area 203m (S901). If it is determined that there is no winning detection information (S901: No), the process proceeds to S904. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is winning detection information (S901: Yes), the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls are calculated based on the information in the winning detection information storage area 203m (S902). Here, the number of acquired balls is determined by the winning opening, and the relationship between the winning opening and the acquired number of balls is defined in advance.

  Next, a winning ball detection command is set based on the calculated number of winning balls and the number of winning balls (S903). The winning ball detection command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning ball detection command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls from the winning ball detection command, and stores the extracted values in the game information totaling area 223i of the RAM 223.

  When the process of S901 or S903 ends, it is determined whether there is information that the game ball has passed through the outlet (S904). If there is information that the game ball has passed through the out mouth (S904: Yes), an out ball detection command is set (S905). The winning ball detection command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the out-ball detection command, the sound lamp control device 113 adds 1 to the value of the total driving ball counter 223 i 1 in the game information totaling area 223 i of the RAM 223. On the other hand, when the game ball has not passed through the outlet (S904: No), the process of S905 is skipped and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1001), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1101). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104). If it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105), and if not stored (S1105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S1112 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process moves to S1112 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1214 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1112, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1112). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1113, S1114) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1113, S1114) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1113), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1114). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1105: Yes), and if the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1110, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1111), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1201 to S1207 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1210 and S1211 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1201). Specifically, the presence / absence of information in the winning detection information storage area 203m detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 is determined. A prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls is transmitted. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) or the start winning process (see FIG. 28) or the winning information command set in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 29). Send to. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the jackpot start command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) and the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1203). A jackpot type determination process for selecting a jackpot type based on the game ball passing through the gate 650b is executed (S1204). Details of the processing of S1204 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the case of a special symbol jackpot state, a jackpot effect is executed and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1205). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific winning opening 65a in the final round, the end of the jackpot is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1205) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the processing of S1205 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 64b is executed (S1206). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1207). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 27) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 26), a variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed. The first symbol display device 37 starts. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on. If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 26) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 27) is completed, The variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1207). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30) or the process of S721, the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 30), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S713 or S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30). (Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 receives the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1209). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1209: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the processes after S1201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1209: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, until the next main process execution timing is reached. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1210, S1211).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1210). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1202 (S1211).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1208, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 33 has been executed, the power-off process after S1212 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1212), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1213). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1214), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1215), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1208 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1201 to S1207 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1210 and S1211 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1201. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process at power-off, and the stack pointer is not changed in the initial setting process (S1101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1201. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main controller 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot type determination process (S1204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the jackpot type determination process (S1204). This jackpot type determination process (FIG. 36, S1204) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 35), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state of a special symbol, the first gate 650a or This is a process for selecting a jackpot type based on the passing of the game ball through the second gate 650b.

  In the jackpot type determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is on (S1301). Here, the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON when the variation display variation time in which the lottery result is a jackpot has elapsed (that is, when the variation display stops) (see S218 in FIG. 25). That is, it is shown that the player is given the right to be able to start the big hit game when the big hit flag 203k is set to ON. In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 25, S104), when the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON (see S218 in FIG. 25), a jackpot command is set (see S219 in FIG. 25), and then the sound lamp control device 113 is set. When the jackpot command is transmitted to the player, a display (FIG. 7B or FIG. 8) prompting the player to pass the game ball to either the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b is displayed. . Thereafter, a jackpot type selection is executed for either the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b based on the gate through which the game ball first passes.

  When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not on (S1301: No), since the jackpot has not occurred, the processing is terminated as it is, and the processing returns to the main processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the first gate 650a (S1302). In the present embodiment, detection of whether or not the game ball has passed through the first gate 650a is performed in the switch reading process (see S101 in FIG. 24) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and in the process of S1302. The presence or absence of detection in the switch reading process is determined. Although not shown, a flag corresponding to each switch is set in the RAM 203, and a corresponding flag is detected for a winning opening in which the passing of a game ball is detected by the switch reading process (S101 in FIG. 24). Set to on. The flags are all set to OFF based on the execution of the switch reading process at the next interrupt, and are set to ON based on the newly read information. . Note that it may be configured to detect whether or not a game ball has passed through the first gate in the process of S1302.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1302 that the game ball has passed through the first gate 650a (S1302: Yes), the jackpot flag 203k is set to off (S1303) and is set as the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. The jackpot type is selected from the first gate selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 15A) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 (S1304). Next, the jackpot start is set (S1305), the jackpot start command is set (S1306), and this process ends. Here, by setting the jackpot flag 203k to off based on the passage of the first gate 650a, the jackpot is based on the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b through which the game ball first passes after the jackpot The type can be determined. The jackpot start command set in the process of S1306 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, it transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114 (see S2006 in FIG. 43), and calculates and stores a difference ball at the time of the jackpot start (FIG. 43). 43 S2005). As will be described in detail later, the number of game balls actually acquired by the player in the jackpot game is calculated by comparing the difference ball at the start of the jackpot with the difference ball at the end of the jackpot. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1302 that the game ball has not passed through the first gate 650a (S1302: No), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the second gate 650b (S1307). . If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second gate 650b (S1307: Yes), the processing from S1308 to S1311 is executed. The processing from S1308 to S1311 differs from the processing from S1303 to S1306 described above in that the jackpot type is determined using the second gate selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 15B), and the other processing is the same. Since it is a process, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When it is determined in the process of S1302 that the game ball has not passed through the first gate 650a (S1302: No), and in the process of S1307, it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the second gate 650b (S1307). : No), this process is terminated as it is. Here, the jackpot flag 203k is turned off only when the game ball passes through the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b. Therefore, after the jackpot occurs, the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b is turned off. Until the game ball passes, the passage of the game ball of the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b can be repeatedly determined (S1302 or S1307) in the main process (FIG. 35). In the present embodiment, the passage of the game ball of the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b is determined in the main process, but it may be determined in the timer interruption process.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1205) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1205). This jackpot control process (S1205) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific winning prize ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k of the special symbol is on (S1401). In the process of S1401, if the special symbol jackpot medium or jackpot flag 203k is off (S1401: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if the special symbol jackpot medium or jackpot flag 203k is on (S1401: Yes), the gate control process is executed (S1402).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the gate control process (S1402) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this gate control processing (S1402). This gate control process (S1402) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, the game ball is moved to the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b. This is a process for switching the position of the sorting member 900 for sorting.

  In the gate control process, first, 1 is added to the gate time counter 203n (S1501). Next, it is determined whether or not the gate time counter 203n is greater than 1250 (S1502). If it is determined that the gate time counter 203n is greater than 1250 (S1503), the position of the sorting member 900 is switched (S1503), and the gate time counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S1504).

  Here, since the gate control process is repeatedly executed every 4 ms in the main process, the position of the sorting member can be switched every time the gate time counter 203n reaches 1250 (that is, 5s). In addition, the position of the sorting member 900 is either a position where the game ball passes to the first gate 650a (FIG. 3A) or a position where the game ball passes to the second gate 650b (FIG. 3B). It can be switched to become.

  In this embodiment, the determination value of the gate time counter 203n is 1250 (a value that becomes 5 s), but may be a smaller value or a larger value.

  Here, returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. When the processing of S1402 is completed, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1403). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1403: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1404), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1405). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1403 (S1403: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1406). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1406, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1406: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1406, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is established (S1406: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1407), It is determined whether or not the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a this time is for the final round (that is, whether or not all of the jackpot rounds have ended) (S1408).

  If it is determined that the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed in the final round (S1408: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a probable big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a probable jackpot based on the first hit type counter C2 in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (203a or 203b) of the special symbol in which the jackpot game has been executed. . If it is determined that the probability variation is a big hit (S1409: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is turned on (S1410), and the processing proceeds to S1412. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation is not a big win (S1409: No), since it is a time-shortage big hit in this embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is turned off (S1411), and the processing proceeds to S1412. In the process of S1412, end of jackpot is set (S1412), then a jackpot end command is set based on the number of rounds (S1413), and this process ends. If it is determined that the round in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed is not the final round (S1408: No), the processing from S1409 to S1413 is skipped, and this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 61. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is activated when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1817 (see FIG. 41) is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1814 in FIG. 41), it executes a power-off process in S1818. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1818 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1602: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process at S1818 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1818, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1602: Yes), the current ramp-up process is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1818, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1604 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1604, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1606). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1608, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1608). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S1818 is executed (see S1816 in FIG. 41). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1818 is executed, the process of S1608 in the state in which the power-off flag 223y is turned on is the same as the current startup process. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1818 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1609), a data reading process is executed (S1610), and the power-off flag is set. 223y is set to OFF (S1611). Details of the data reading process (S1610) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1612), interrupt permission is set (S1613), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1608 is reached when the power-off flag 223y is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S1604 to S1606. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), the process from S1609 to S1610, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1612, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1612). The interrupt permission is set (S1613), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process of S1609 is that when the process from S1604 to S1606 is reached via the process of S1606, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1604. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, and thereby the sound lamp control device 113 is stored. This is because the control can be continued.

  Here, the data reading process (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the data reading process (S1610). This data reading process (S1610) is the data stored in the data storage process (S1817) executed when the occurrence of power interruption is detected in the main process (FIG. 41) of the sound lamp control device described later (this embodiment). In the form, it is processing for reading out game information and game total information input by the player.

  In the data reading process, first, current time information is acquired from the time register 263a of the RTC 260 (S1701), and is executed when the occurrence of power interruption is detected in the main process (FIG. 41) of the sound lamp control device from the other register 263b. The data stored by the data storage process (S1817) is acquired (S1702). Next, the date information of the data acquired from the other register 263b and the date information acquired from the time register are compared to determine whether the dates match (S1703). If the dates of the date information do not match (S1703: No), the power is cut off due to the closing of the store or the like, and it is determined that the player will not play the game continuously, so the game information reading process is not performed. Finally, this process ends.

  Thereby, when the store is opened next after the store is closed, it is possible to reduce the trouble of initializing the information of the other register 263b or executing the process of clearing the pachinko machine 10 to the RAM.

  On the other hand, if the dates of the date information match (S1703: Yes), the data acquired from the other register 263b is stored in each area of the game information storage area 223h and the game information totaling area 223i (S1704), and the continuation confirmation flag 223m Is set to ON (S1705). Here, when the continuation confirmation flag 223m is set to ON, a display game continuation confirmation start command is transmitted to the display control device by the navigation game processing (S1811) executed in the main processing of the sound lamp control device described later, and the navigation A screen for selecting whether or not to continue the game (FIG. 10A) is displayed.

  As a result, when the power is turned off and then turned on again after a game due to a power failure or repair of a malfunction, a screen asking whether or not to continue the navigation game is displayed. It is possible to notify the player that the game information is set without being erased. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with peace of mind even after the power is turned off. In addition, even when the player is changed while the power is turned off, it is possible to recognize that the new player is in a state where the game information is set, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  In the present embodiment, when the game information matching the current date is set after the power is turned on, after executing the process of S1704, instead of executing the process of S1705, the navigation game flag The data reading process (FIG. 40, S1610) may be terminated by setting 223j to ON. With this configuration, when the power is turned on again, if the time in the preset game information has already passed, the extension is confirmed by the navigation game end process (FIG. 57, S2605). The display mode (see FIG. 9A) can be configured to be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of continuation or the like from being displayed every time after turning on the power, and it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player feels troublesome.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous processing of S1801 was executed (S1801). If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1812 without performing the processes in S1802 to S1811. In S1801, the process of determining whether 1 msec has passed or not is mainly related to the display (effect) in S1802 to S1811, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1812 and the variation display setting process of S1813 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1812 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S1813 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1803 to S1813 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1808 described later are set (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1805 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1805, a waiting-for-customer effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on the reserved lamp is performed according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a predetermined period such as a period when the variation effect is not executed, a navigation game setting screen (see FIG. 6) is displayed by a navigation game process (S1811) described later. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation to the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1809, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S1808 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1809 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, a navigation game process is executed (S1811), and the process proceeds to S1812. In the navigation game processing, a setting screen for performing a navigation game is displayed based on the fact that the frame button has been pressed during a predetermined period such as a period in which the variation effect is not executed, and the selection switch is displayed while the setting screen is displayed. Based on the depression of 270 (a) to (d), the display on the screen is changed, and setting information for performing the navigation game can be set. Detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 to 56.

  In the process of S1812, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1812). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1813). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1813 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1814). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1814 (S1814: Yes), both the power interruption flag 223y and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1816), and data storage processing is executed (S1817). A power-off process is executed (S1818). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1819), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1815), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1815: No), the process returns to S1801, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1815: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Here, for the detailed description of each process in the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 described above, for the sake of convenience, the details of the command determination process (S1812) are described first. Each process will be described in turn.

  Next, a command determination process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1812). This command determination processing (S1812) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination processing (S1812), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1901). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on (S1902), the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S1903), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 60) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if a variation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 31) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1907). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1907: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (special The variable display hold count N1) in the symbol 1 or the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball counter 203e (the variable display hold count N2 in the special symbol 2) is extracted, and this is extracted as the special symbol 1 hold ball of the voice lamp control device 113. The number is stored in the number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (S1908), and the process returns to the main process. In the processing of S1908, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set.

  Here, since the ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64a (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected, or every time the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter of the voice lamp control device 113 by the processing of S1908. The value of 223c can be matched with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the special symbol lottery even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. To the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1908 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1607, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1907: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1909). When a winning information command is received (S1909: Yes), the lottery result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command, and the winning information storage area of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is extracted. Store in the first area of 223a (S1910), and return to the main process. In the process of S1910, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  On the other hand, if a winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1909 (S1909: No), it is then determined whether or not a command for jackpot has been received (S1911). When a command related to jackpot is received (S1912), a jackpot related process is executed (S1912), and the process returns to the main process. Details of the jackpot related processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

  In the process of S1911, when the command related to the jackpot is not received (S1911: No), it is determined whether or not a winning ball detection command is received from the main control device 110 (S1913). If a winning ball detection command is received (S1913: Yes), a winning ball determination process is executed (S1914), and the process returns to the main process. Details of the winning ball discrimination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the winning ball detection command is not received in the process of S1913 (S1913: No), it is determined whether or not the out ball detection command is received from the main controller 110 (S1915). If an out-sphere detection command is received (S1915: Yes), an out-sphere discrimination process is executed (S1916) and the process returns to the main process. Details of the out-ball discrimination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1915, when the out ball detection command is not received (S1915: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1917). ), The process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46, the jackpot related process (S1912), which is one process in the command determination process (FIG. 42, S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related processing (S1912). This jackpot related process (S1912) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, determines the command related to the jackpot received from the main control device 110, and the command The process according to is executed.

  In the jackpot related process (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot command is received from the main controller 110 (S2001). When the jackpot command is received (S2001: Yes), the display jackpot command is set (S2002), the navigation process is executed (S2003), and the process returns to the command determination process. The display jackpot command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and display control is performed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Sent to device 114. When receiving the display jackpot command, the display control device 114 displays a display (FIG. 7A) suggesting the occurrence of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the navigation process (S2003) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the navigation process (S2003). This navigation process (S2003) is executed in the jackpot related process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the game information storage area 223h, the game information totaling area 223i, and the current time storage. A display navigation type command is set based on each information of the area 223q.

  Specifically, in the navigation process (FIG. 44, S2003), first, in the game information storage area 223h, the game end time that is the data of the game time storage area 223h1 and the target difference that is the data of the target difference ball storage area 223h2. The number of balls is acquired (S2101). Next, the value (P1) of the total driving ball counter 223i1 in the game information totaling area 223i, the value (P2) of the total acquired ball counter 223i2, and the 1R difference ball number which is data of the 1R difference ball storage area 223i4 are acquired. (S2102). After the processing in S2102, the current time, which is data in the current time storage area 223q, is acquired (S2103).

  After the processing from S2101 to S2103, the number of remaining target rounds is calculated by dividing the above-mentioned target number of balls by subtracting the current number of balls (P2-P1) by the number of 1R balls (S2104). ), It is determined whether or not the game time is at the end (S2105). Here, whether or not the game time is in the final stage is determined by comparing the game end time acquired in the process of S2101 with the current time acquired in the process of S2103, and the remaining time from the current time to the game end time. The determination is made based on whether or not the time is within a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 minutes).

  If it is determined in S2105 that the game time is not the final stage (S2105: No), the navigation type is selected based on the remaining target round number calculated in S2104 and the navigation selection table 222a (S2106). ), A navigation type command is set based on the selected navigation type (S2107), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the start of the big hit (right of the big hit game is granted) is determined, the target difference ball set by the player and the 1R difference ball number in the previous jackpot game are determined. Since the number of current rounds required to achieve the target is calculated, and the remaining number of rounds is used to navigate whether the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b should be aimed, so that more players The player can easily make a selection according to the goal.

  Also, since the gate to navigate is selected based on the game time set by the player (remaining time until the game end time), it is easy to achieve the target with the remaining game time. it can. Furthermore, since the predicted difference ball at the end of the game is displayed when the remaining game time decreases, it is possible to reduce the burden of the player playing the game while calculating the difference ball at the end.

  In the present embodiment, the remaining target round number is calculated based on the average 1R difference ball number in the previous jackpot in the processing of S2102, but not limited to this, the average of a plurality of times (for example, ten times or jackpot from power-on) It may be 1R difference ball number. Further, the number of remaining target rounds may be calculated not only from the number of difference balls but also from the time required to execute the jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the remaining game time is equal to or less than the predetermined time, the number of predicted difference balls at the end time is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Good. The predicted difference ball number may always display the difference ball number when each jackpot type is currently executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while considering a gate to be aimed next during a normal game. Furthermore, review of the goal setting can be considered, and a game that matches the player's situation can be provided.

  Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. In the process of S2001, if the jackpot command has not been received (S2001: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S2004). If a jackpot start command has been received (S2004: Yes), a start difference calculation process is executed (S2005), a display jackpot start command is set (S2006), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In order to calculate the 1R difference ball number, which is the difference between the number of balls hit by the player per 1R of the jackpot game and the number acquired by the player, by the start difference ball calculation process (S2005) executed here. The difference ball number at the start of the jackpot is calculated. Details of the start difference ball calculation process (S2005) will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, a display (not shown) that suggests the start of a jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by a display jackpot start command that is set next to the start difference ball calculation process.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 45, the start difference ball calculation process (S2005) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the start difference ball calculation process (S2005). This start difference ball calculation process (S2005) is executed in the jackpot related process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the player has driven in per 1R of the above jackpot game. This is a process for calculating the number of balls at the start of the jackpot game in order to calculate the number of 1R difference balls, which is the difference between the number of balls and the number acquired by the player.

  In the start difference ball calculation process, the value (P1) of the total driving ball counter 223i1 and the value 223i2 (P2) of the total acquired ball counter 223i1 in the game information totaling area 223i are acquired (S2201), and the total number of acquired balls A value obtained by subtracting the value (P1) of the total pitched ball counter 223i1 from the value (P2) of the counter 223i2 is stored in the start difference ball storage area 223i3 as the difference ball number at the time of starting the big hit game, and this processing is finished. .

  As described above, by calculating and storing the difference ball at the start time of the jackpot, it is possible to calculate an accurate difference ball based on the game ball acquired by the jackpot game. Therefore, accurate navigation can be performed by the player.

  Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2004 that a jackpot start command has not been received (S2004: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2007). If received (S2007: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S2008), a display round number command is set according to the extracted round number (S2009), and this process is performed. finish. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1616 (S2007: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot end command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2010). When a jackpot end command is received (S2010: Yes), 1R difference ball calculation processing is performed (S2011), a display jackpot end command is set (S2009), and this processing ends. The display jackpot end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot end command, the display control device 114 displays a display (not shown) indicating the end of the jackpot game on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot end command has not been received in the processing of S2010 (S2010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed ( S2013), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the winning ball determination process (S1914) executed in the command determination process (FIG. 42) described above will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the winning ball discrimination process (S1914). This winning ball determination process (S1914) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and based on the received command, data in the game information totaling area 223i. Is a process for updating.

  Specifically, in the winning ball discriminating process, the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls are extracted from the received command (S2401), and the number of winning balls is added to the total driving ball counter 223i1 of the game information totaling area 223i. Then, the number of acquired balls is added to the total acquired ball number counter 223i2 (S2402), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, by updating the total hit ball number counter 223i1 and the total acquired ball number counter 223i2, it is possible to calculate an accurate difference ball number at the present time. If the current difference ball number is configured to be displayed, the difference ball number is displayed based on the information updated in the winning ball determination process (FIG. 47, S1914), so that the player It is possible to accurately compare the number of difference balls and the target.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the out-ball discrimination process (S1916) executed in the command determination process (FIG. 42) described above will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the out-ball discrimination process (S1916). In the out-ball discrimination process (S1916), the data of the game information totaling area 223i is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 and based on the received command. Is a process for updating.

  In the out-ball discrimination process (FIG. 48, S1916), first, the value of the total hit ball number counter 223i1 is read (S2501). Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the total driving ball number counter 223i1, and the total driving ball number counter 223i1 is set (S2502).

  In this way, every time a game ball enters the out port 66, the total number of hit balls counter 223i1 is incremented by 1 and updated, so that the number of game balls fired by the player can be correctly determined. . Note that the total number of hit balls 223i1 is updated by adding not only the out balls but also the number of game balls won in other winning ports.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the navigation game process (S1811) executed in the main process (see FIG. 41) described above will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this navigation game process (S1811). This navigation game process (S1811) is performed during the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the display related to the navigation game is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (from FIG. 6). This is a process for displaying FIG.

  In the navigation game process (FIG. 49, S1811), first, date and time information is acquired from the time register 263a of the RTC 260 and stored in the current time storage area 223q (S2601). Here, since the navigation game process is executed every 1 ms in the main process of the voice lamp control process, the date and time information in the current time storage area 223q can be updated every 1 ms. In the present embodiment, the information in the current time storage area 223q is updated in the main process. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the RTC 260 is provided in the main controller 113, and the main controller 113 The time information may be received as a command and updated.

  Next, it is determined whether it is a navigation game setting possible period (S2602). If it is determined that it is the navigation game setting possible period (S2602: Yes), the navigation game setting process is executed (S2603), and the process proceeds to S2604. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the navigation game setting possible period (S2602: No), the process of S2603 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2604. Here, the determination as to whether or not it is the navigation game setting period is performed as to whether or not an effect that requires pressing of the frame button 22 is not performed. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is pressed, a period during which the variation pattern in which the production or the like is varied is not executed. With this configuration, the player can set the navigation game at a desired timing as appropriate, which is convenient. Although illustration is omitted, a flag indicating that it is a navigation game setting possible period is set, and if the flag is on, the process of S2602 is determined as Yes. Further, it is easier to turn off this flag based on the fact that the effect of pressing the frame button 22 is set, and execute the process of turning it on again based on the completion of the effect. In addition, it is possible to execute a process for determining whether or not it is a settable period of the navigation game.

  In the present embodiment, the setting of the navigation game is a period in which the effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame button 22 is pressed long (for example, for 3 seconds). Thus, the navigation setting may be configured. Moreover, it is good also as a within period only when the demonstration screen is displayed or when the special symbol variation display is executed. In addition, when the setting of the navigation game is being executed, it is possible to perform the game more stably by prohibiting or invalidating the setting using the frame button 22.

  Here, the navigation game setting process (S2603) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the navigation game setting process (S2603). This navigation game setting process (S2603) displays a display (FIG. 6) for setting game information relating to the navigation game on the third symbol display device 81, and the operated selection switch (upper switch 270a, right switch 270b, This is a process for setting game information based on the lower switch 270c and the left switch 270d).

  In the navigation game setting process (FIG. 49, S1811), first, it is determined whether or not the game information input flag 223f is on (S2701). If it is determined that the game information input flag 223f is on (S2701: Yes), a switch determination process is executed (S2702), and this process ends. Details of the switch determination processing (S2702) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game information input flag 223f is not on (S2701: No), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2703). If it is determined in step S2703 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed, this processing ends. Here, the determination regarding the pressing of the frame button 22 is to determine whether or not the pressing of the frame button is detected in the processing of S1807 of the main processing (see FIG. 41). Therefore, in the process of S2703, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected, after the process in the main process is executed, it is repeatedly executed to determine again the pressing of the frame button 22 in the process of S2703. be able to. In this embodiment, the process returns to the main process when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the process of S2703. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process waits until the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. It may be. Thus, the main process is not executed until the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, and the process at the time of detecting the pressing of the frame button 22 and the main process can be synchronized.

  If it is determined in step S2703 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2703: Yes), the game information input flag 223f is set on and the button effect prohibition flag 223g is set on (S2704). Next, a display game information input start command is set based on the current time information in the current time storage area 223q (S2705), and this process ends. The process of S2705 is a process for setting the current time at the game end time when the game information input screen is displayed, whereby the game end time is input after the current time. Therefore, the number of operations for the player to input the game end time can be reduced as compared to when the setting start is 0:00. In the process of S2705, the time 1 input area 223r1 and the time 2 input area 223r2 of the input area 223r are updated based on the current time information so that the current time is input at the game end time. The display game information input start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 (S1802). The information is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display game information input start command, the display control device 114 displays a screen (FIG. 6) on which game information can be input on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the switch determination process (S2702) for performing the process based on the switch operation corresponding to the screen on which the game information can be input can be executed by the game information input flag 223f set to ON. Further, the button effect prohibition flag 223g that is set to ON here prevents other effects requiring button operation from being displayed while the screen on which game information can be input is displayed. It is possible to prevent an effect or the like necessary for the button operation from being displayed, and to prevent confusion of the player.

  Here, the details of the switch determination processing (S2702) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this switch discrimination processing (S2702). This switch discrimination process (S2702) is a process for performing a process based on the operation of the switch when the third symbol display device 81 displays a screen (FIG. 6) on which game information can be input.

  In the switch determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper switch 270a is pressed (S2801). If it is determined that the upper switch 270a has been pressed (S2801: Yes), the upper switch process is executed (S2802), and the process proceeds to S2803. On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper switch 270a has not been pressed (S2801: No), the process of S2802 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2803. Here, the determination as to whether or not the upper switch 270a has been pressed is performed in the same manner as the determination (S2703) as to whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed in the above-described navigation game setting process (see FIG. 50).

  Here, the details of the upper switch process (S2802) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the upper switch process (S2802). This upper switch process (S2802) is to perform a process based on the depression of the upper switch 270a when a screen (FIG. 6) on which game information can be input is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is processing of.

  In the upper switch process, first, data of the cursor position storage area 223p is acquired (S2901), and it is determined whether or not the acquired data of the cursor position storage area 223p is time 1 (S2902). If it is determined that the acquired data in the cursor position storage area 223p is time 1 (S2902: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 of the input area 223r (S2903). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 is greater than 23 (S2904). If it is determined that the value is greater than 23 (S2904: Yes), the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 is changed to 0. (S2905), the process proceeds to S2918. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2904 that the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 is not greater than 23 (S2904: No), the process of S2905 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2918.

  Here, the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 set in the processing from S2903 to S2905 is for setting the time of the game end time on the game information input screen (FIG. 6). Therefore, by the processes of S2904 and S2905, the settable time can be set from 0 to 23:00 and no other values can be set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2902 that the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is not time 1 (S2902: No), it is determined whether or not the cursor position is time 2 (S2906). If it is determined that it is time 2 (S2906: Yes), the same processing as the processing from S2903 to S2905 described above is performed for the time 2 input region 223r2 of the input region 223r. The processing from S2903 to S2905 is different from the processing from S2907 to S2908 in the portion that determines whether or not the determination of the upper limit value is greater than 5 in the processing of S2908, and the others are the same, so detailed description thereof is omitted. To do. In the process of S2908, it is determined whether or not the upper limit value is greater than 5. The time 2 input area 223r2 sets the tens place of the game end time on the game information input screen (FIG. 6). This is because the settable minutes are only 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, or 50 minutes. Here, in the present embodiment, the amount that can be set is only one of the above-mentioned values, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the settable value may be reduced to only one of 0 and 30 minutes. The settable value may be increased so that it can be set in units of minutes. As a result, when the settable value is reduced, the player can select the set value, so that the setting time can be shortened because there are few choices. When the settable value is increased, the player wants to set A value closer to the game end time can be set.

  Next, in the processing of S2906, when it is determined that the cursor position is not time 2 (S2906: No), it is then determined whether or not the cursor position is difference ball 1 (S2910), and the cursor position is different. When it is determined that the ball is the ball 1 (S2910: Yes), the same processing as the processing from S2903 to S2905 described above is performed on the difference ball 1 input region 223r3 of the input region 223r. The processing from S2903 to S2905 and the processing from S2911 to S2913 are different in the portion for determining whether or not the determination of the upper limit value is larger than 99 in the processing of S2912, and the others are the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. To do.

  Here, the value of the difference ball 1 input area 223r3 set in the processing from S2910 to S2913 is for setting the value of the target difference ball of 1000 balls on the game information input screen (FIG. 6). Therefore, by the processing of S2912 and S2913, the 1000 position of the target difference ball can be set from 0 to 99 (that is, the 10000 position can also be set).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the cursor position is not the difference ball 1 (S2910: No), it is then determined whether the cursor position is the difference ball 2 (S2914), and the cursor position is the difference ball 2 When it is determined (S2914: Yes), the same processing as the processing from S2903 to S2905 described above is performed on the difference ball 2 input area 223r4 of the input area 223r. The processing from S2903 to S2905 and the processing from S2915 to S2917 are different in the portion for determining whether or not the determination of the upper limit value is larger than 9 in the processing of S2916, and the others are the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. To do.

  Here, the value of the difference ball 2 input area 223r4 set in the processing from S2915 to S2917 is for setting the value of the target difference ball in units of 100 balls on the game information input screen (FIG. 6). Therefore, the hundreds of the target difference ball can be set to a value from 0 to 9 by the processing of S2916 and S2917.

  Through the processing from S2911 to S2913 and the processing from S2915 to S2917, the target difference ball can be set from 0 to 99900 balls in units of 100 balls. In the present embodiment, the target difference ball that can be set is set to 100 balls. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the settable value may be reduced such as 1000 balls, or set so that 50 balls can be set. The possible values may be increased. As a result, when the settable value is reduced, the player can select the set value, so that the setting time can be shortened because there are few choices. When the settable value is increased, the player wants to set A value closer to the target difference ball can be set. Further, in this embodiment, the range of values that can be set for the target difference ball is 0 to 99900 balls, but is not limited to this. For example, the value range that can be set for the target difference ball is 0 to 19900 balls. The upper limit value may be reduced, or the upper limit value may be increased from 0 to 999900 in the range of values that can be set for the target difference ball. As a result, if the upper limit value that can be set is reduced, the setting time can be shortened because there are few choices when the player selects the set value, and if the upper limit value that can be set is increased, the player wants to set It is possible to set a value closer to the target difference ball considered.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2914 that the cursor position is not the difference ball 2 (S2914: No), the cursor position is one of set, reset, and return positions, and therefore, based on pressing of the upper switch 270a. Since there is no processing to be executed, this processing is terminated as it is.

  After the processing of S2904, S2905, S2908, S2909, S2912, S2913, S2916 or S2917, a display input screen update command is set based on the value of the input area 223r (S2918), and this processing ends. The display input screen update command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display input screen update command, the display control device 114 updates the display of the game information input screen (FIG. 6) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received command.

  In the present embodiment, no limit is set for the player's target setting. However, a limit may be set for the difference ball that can be set for the set target time. Here, this limit is a value set in the ROM 202, which is calculated in advance from the design time required to digest the jackpot game and the average appearance on the design value.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. After the process of S2801 or S2802, it is determined whether or not the lower switch 270c is pressed (S2803). Next, if it is determined that the lower switch 270c is pressed (S2803: Yes), the lower switch process is executed (S2804), and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lower switch 270c has not been pressed (S2803: No), the process of S2804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2805. Here, the determination as to whether or not the lower switch 270c has been pressed is performed in the same manner as the determination (S2703) as to whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed in the above-described navigation game setting process (see FIG. 50).

  Here, the details of the lower switch process (S2804) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the lower switch process (S2804). This lower switch process (S2804) is performed based on the depression of the lower switch 270c when the screen (FIG. 6) on which the game information can be input is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The difference is that the addition process in the upper switch process (FIG. 52) is a subtraction process, the determination of the upper limit value is the determination of the lower limit value, and the others are the same. Therefore, only different points will be described, and description of the same points will be omitted.

  If the position of the cursor is time 1 (S3002: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 (S3003), and after the process of S3003, the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 is smaller than 0 ( (S3004: Yes), the value of the time 1 input area 223r1 is changed to 23 (S3005). If the cursor position is time 2 (S3006: Yes), the value of the time 2 input area 223r2 is decremented by 1 (S3007), and the value of the time 2 input area 223r2 is smaller than 0 after the processing of S3007. (S3009: Yes), the value of the time 2 input area 223r2 is changed to 5 (S3005). Thereby, as described above, the time or minute that can be set as the game end time can be subtracted and displayed based on the depression of the lower switch 270c, and the lower switch 270c is depressed even though the display is the lower limit value. In such a case, it can be updated to the upper limit value by the lower limit determination in S3004 or S3008.

  Next, if the cursor position is the difference ball 1 (S3010: Yes), the value of the difference ball 1 input area 223r3 is decremented by 1 (S3011). If it is smaller (S3012: Yes), the value of the difference ball 1 input area 223r3 is changed to 99 (S3013). If the cursor position is the difference ball 2 (S3014: Yes), the value of the difference ball 2 input area 223r4 is decremented by 1 (S3011). After the process of S3011, the value of the difference ball 2 input area 223r4 is set to 9. (S3017). As a result, as described above, the number of balls that can be set as the target difference ball can be subtracted and displayed based on the depression of the lower switch 270c, and the lower switch 270c is depressed even though the display is the lower limit value. In such a case, it can be updated to the upper limit value by the lower limit determination in S3012 or S3016.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. After the processing of S2803 or S2804, it is determined whether or not the right switch 270b has been pressed (S2805). Next, when it is determined that the right switch 270b has been pressed (S2805: Yes), right switch processing is executed (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2807. On the other hand, if it is determined that the right switch 270b has not been pressed (S2805: No), the process of S2806 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2807. Here, the determination as to whether or not the right switch 270c has been pressed is performed in the same manner as the determination (S2703) as to whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed in the above-described navigation game setting process (see FIG. 50).

  Here, the details of the right switch process (S2806) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the right switch process (S2806). This right switch process (S2806) is performed when the screen (FIG. 6) on which the game information can be input is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, based on the right switch 270b being pressed. It is processing of.

  In the right switch process, first, information of the cursor position storage area 223p is acquired (S3101), and it is determined whether or not the cursor position is time (S3102). Next, when it is determined that the cursor position is time (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the cursor position is time 1 (S3103). If it is determined that the cursor position is time 1 (S3103: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to time 2 (S3104), and the process proceeds to S3115. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cursor position is not at time 1 (S3103: No), the cursor position is at time 2, so the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to difference 1 (S3105), and the process of S3115 Migrate to

  If it is determined in step S3102 that the cursor position is not the time (S3102: No), it is then determined whether the cursor position is a difference ball (S3106). When it is determined that the cursor position is the difference ball (S3106: Yes), it is determined whether or not the cursor position is the difference ball 1 (S3107). If it is determined that the cursor position is the difference ball 1 (S3107: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to the difference ball 2 (S3108), and the process proceeds to S3115. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cursor position is not the difference ball 1 (S3107: No), since the cursor position is the difference ball 2, the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to the setting (S3109), and the process of S3115 Migrate to

  In the process of S3106, when it is determined that the cursor position is not a difference ball (S3106: No), it is then determined whether or not the cursor position is set (S3110). If it is determined that the cursor position is set (S3110: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to reset (S3111), and the process proceeds to S3115.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the cursor position is not set (S3110: No), it is then determined whether or not the cursor position is reset (S3112). If it is determined that the cursor position is reset (S3112: Yes), it is determined whether or not the cursor position is reset (S3112). If it is determined that the cursor position is reset (S3112: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to return (S3113), and the process proceeds to S3115. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cursor position is not reset (S3112: No), the cursor position returns, so the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to time 1 (S3114), and the process proceeds to S3115. .

  After the processing of S3104, S3105, S3108, S3109, S3111, S3113 or S3114, a display input screen update command is set based on the value of the input area 223r (S3115), and this processing ends. The display input screen update command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display input screen update command, the display control device 114 updates the display of the game information input screen (FIG. 6) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received command. Thereby, on the game information input screen, the position of the cursor can be changed and displayed based on the pressing of the right switch 270b.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. After the processing of S2805 or S2806, it is determined whether or not the left switch 270d has been pressed. Next, when it is determined that the left switch 270d has been pressed (S2808: Yes), the left switch process is executed (S2808), and the process proceeds to S2809. On the other hand, if it is determined that the left switch 270d has not been pressed (S2807: No), the process of S2808 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2809. Here, the determination of whether or not the left switch 270d has been pressed is performed in the same manner as the determination of whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed in the above-described navigation game setting process (see FIG. 50) (S2703).

  Here, the details of the left switch process (S2808) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the left switch process (S2808). This left switch process (S2808) is performed based on the left switch 270d being pressed when the screen (FIG. 6) on which the game information can be input is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This processing is different from the right switch processing (FIG. 54) in that the setting value in the cursor position storage area 223p is different, and the others are the same. Therefore, only different points will be described, and descriptions of other same points will be omitted.

  In the left switch process, when the left switch 270d is pressed and the cursor position is at time 1 (S3203: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to return (S3204), and the cursor position is at time 2. If so (S3203: No), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to time 1 (S3205), and if the cursor position is the difference 1 (S3207: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to the time. 2 (S3208), if the cursor position is the difference ball 2 (S3207: No), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to the difference ball 1 (S3209), and if the cursor position is set (S3210) : Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to time 2 (S3211), the cursor If the position is reset (S3212: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to the setting (S3213). If the cursor position returns (S3212: No), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is reset. (S3214).

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. When the processing of S2807 or S2808 is completed, it is determined whether or not the frame button has been pressed (S2809). If it is determined that the frame button has been pressed (S2809: Yes), the frame button process is executed (S2810), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button has not been pressed (S2809: No), the process of S2810 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Here, the details of the frame button process (S2810) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this frame button processing (S2810). The frame button process (S2810) is performed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 when a screen (FIG. 6) on which game information can be input is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is processing of.

  In the frame button process, first, data of the cursor position storage area 223p is acquired (S3301), and it is determined whether or not the cursor position is set in the acquired data (S3302). If it is determined that the cursor position is set (S3302: Yes), then data in the current time storage area 223q and data in the input area 223r are acquired (S3303), and the game time is later than the current time. It is determined whether or not (S3304). In the process of S3304, when it is determined that the game end time based on the time 1 input area 223r1 and the time 2 input area 223r2 of the input area 223r is not later than the current time which is data in the current time storage area 223q (S3304: No), since the game end time has passed, a display game information input error command is set (S3309), and this process ends. The display game information input error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display game information input error command, the display control device 114 displays a game information input error screen (not shown) that indicates that the game information input in the third symbol display device 81 is an error. . Thereby, the player can recognize that the input game end time is an error. In this embodiment, an error occurs when the game end time is not later than the current time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a time before the current time may not be selected.

  On the other hand, if the game end time in the input area 223r is later than the current time in the current time storage area 223q in the process of S3304 (S3304: Yes), all information in the game information total area 223i is initialized (S3305). ), Game end time data based on the time 1 input area 223r1 and the time 2 input area 223r2 of the input area 223r are stored in the game time storage area 223h1 of the game information storage area 223h, and the difference 1 input area of the input area 223r The target difference ball data based on 223r3 and the difference ball 2 input area 223r4 is stored in the target difference ball storage area 223h2 of the game information storage area 223h, and the input area 223r is initialized (S3306). In the present embodiment, in the process of S3305, all the information of the game information totaling area 223i is initialized, but not limited to this, only the information of the 1R difference ball storage area 223i4 may not be initialized, It may be initialized to a predetermined value. As a result, even when a big hit is made for the first time after the start of the navigation game, the 1R difference ball can be acquired, so that the final difference ball at the end of the game can be calculated. In the present embodiment, the game end time is input and stored in the process of S3306. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a game time (for example, 2 hours) from the current time is used. You may enter and store.

  Next, the navigation game flag 223j is set to ON (S3307), a display game information input completion command is set (S3308), and the process proceeds to S3318. The display game information input completion command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display game information input completion command, the display control device 114 changes the game information input screen (FIG. 6) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the original screen (such as a demo screen). Thereby, after inputting game information, it can be in the state which can start or continue a game. In addition, you may make it display the display which confirms the input game information on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3302 that the cursor position is not set (S3310), it is then determined whether the cursor position is reset (S3310), and the cursor position is determined to be reset. (S3310: Yes), it is determined whether or not the navigation game flag 223j is on (S3311). If it is determined that the navigation game flag 223j is not on (S3311: No), the navigation game is not executed and there is no information to be reset, and thus the process directly proceeds to S3318. On the other hand, if it is determined that the navigation game flag 223j is on (S3311: Yes), the game information storage area 223h and the input area 223r are initialized to reset the navigation game being executed (S3312), The navigation game flag 223j is set to off (S3313). After the process of S3313, a display game information reset command is set (S3314), and the process proceeds to S3318. The display game information reset command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. And transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display game information reset command, the display control device 114 changes the game information input screen (FIG. 6) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the original screen (such as a demo screen). Thereby, after resetting game information, it can be in the state which can start or continue a game.

  In the process of S3310, when it is determined that the cursor position is not reset (S3310: No), it is determined whether or not the cursor position is returned (S3315). If it is determined that the cursor position is returned (S3315: Yes), the input area 223r is initialized (S3316), and a display game information input stop command is set to erase the display of the game information input screen. (S3317), the process proceeds to S3318. The display game information stop command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display game information stop command, the display control device 114 changes the game information input screen (FIG. 6) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the original screen (such as a demo screen). Thereby, after resetting game information, it can be in the state which can start or continue a game. In addition, you may make it display on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 the confirmation which cancels the input of game information.

  On the other hand, if the cursor position does not return in the process of S3315 (S3315: No), this process is terminated as it is because there is no process based on the frame button being pressed. Note that a display suggesting that there is no processing based on pressing of the frame button may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  After the processing of S3308, S3314 or S3317, the game information input flag 223f and the button effect prohibition flag 223g are set to OFF (S3318). Thereby, the switch discriminating process (S2702) for performing the process based on the switch operation in the navigation game setting process (FIG. 50) can be prevented from being executed when the game information input screen is not displayed. In addition, other effects requiring button operation are displayed by the button effect prohibition flag 223g set to OFF here.

  Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. After the process of S2602 or S2603, it is determined based on the navigation game flag 223j whether or not a navigation game is being performed (S2604). When it is determined that the navigation game is not being performed (the navigation game flag 223j is OFF) (S2604: No), the process proceeds to S2606, and the navigation game is being determined (the navigation game flag 223j is ON). (S2604: Yes), a navigation game end process is executed (S2605), and the process proceeds to S2606.

  Here, the details of the navigation game end process (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the navigation game end process (S2605). This navigation game end process (S2605) determines whether the current time is the game end time during execution of the navigation game, and ends the navigation game when it is determined that the current time is the game end time. It is processing of.

  In the navigation game end process, first, data in the current time storage area 223q and data in the game information storage area 223h are acquired (S3401). Next, it is determined whether or not the extension confirmation flag 223k is on (S3402). If it is determined that the extension confirmation flag 223k is on (S3402: Yes), an extension confirmation process is executed (S3403). This process ends. Here, as will be described later, the extension confirmation flag 223k is turned on when the current time has passed the game end time. Therefore, when the current time has passed the game end time, the extension confirmation process (S3403). ) Is executed. This extension confirmation process (S3403) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3402 that the extension confirmation flag 223k is not on (S3402: No), the game end is the current time that is the data in the current time storage area 223q is the data in the game time storage area 223h1. It is determined whether the time has passed (S3404). If it is determined that the current time has not passed the game end time (S3404: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the current time has passed the game end time ( S3404: Yes), the extension confirmation flag 223k and the button effect prohibition flag 223g are set to ON (S3405), and the display game extension confirmation command is set based on the data in the current time storage area 223q and the game information totaling area 223i. (S3406), and this process is terminated. The display game extension confirmation command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. And transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display game extension confirmation command, the third symbol display device 81 displays a display (FIG. 9A) for selecting whether or not to extend the navigation game. This notifies the player that the game end time has arrived, and allows the player to select whether to continue the game by extending the game end time or to end the game as it is. In the present embodiment, when the game end time has elapsed, a display for selecting whether or not to extend the navigation game is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when the game end time has elapsed. Alternatively, the game result may be automatically displayed to end the navigation game so that the operation burden on the player can be reduced. In addition, when the game end time is reached during the jackpot, a display for selecting whether or not to extend until the jackpot game ends may not be displayed, and the game end time is automatically extended (for example, 30 minutes). As a result, it is considered that there are few players that will end the game during the jackpot, which is an advantageous state for the player, so by automatically extending the game end time, the operation burden on the player can be reduced and the jackpot It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by displaying an unnecessary display during the game.

  Here, the details of the extension confirmation process (S3403) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the extension confirmation processing (S2605). This extension confirmation process (S2605) is a process for confirming the extension of the game when the current time has passed the game end time while the navigation game is being executed.

  In the extension confirmation process, first, data of the cursor position storage area 223p is acquired (S3501). Next, it is determined whether or not the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is pressed (S3502). If it is determined that the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is pressed (S3502: Yes), the cursor acquired in the processing of S3501. It is determined whether or not the data in the position storage area 223p is extended (S3503). If it is determined that the cursor position is extended (S3503: Yes), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed not to be extended (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3506. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cursor position does not extend (S3503: No), the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is changed to extend (S3505), and the process proceeds to S3506. In the process of S3506, a display input screen update command is set based on the data in the cursor position storage area 223p (S3506), and then this process ends. The display input screen update command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display input screen update command, the display control device 114 does not extend or extend in the display (FIG. 9A) for selecting whether or not to extend the navigation game on the third symbol display device 81. The display of which is selected can be updated. Thereby, it can be clearly shown to the player which is currently selected. In the present embodiment, the command is set without being based on information on which of the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is pressed. However, the command is set based on information on which of the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is pressed. You may make it set. Accordingly, a dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display in which the cursor is shifted to the right side) displayed when the right switch 270b is pressed and a dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display that is displayed when the left switch 270d is pressed) Dynamic display such as the cursor moving to the left).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3502 that the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d has not been pressed (S3502: No), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S3507). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S3507: Yes), it is determined whether or not the data in the cursor position storage area 223p acquired in the processing of S3501 is extended (S3508). If it is determined that the cursor position is extended (S3508: Yes), the game information input flag 223f is set to ON (S3509), the display game information input start command is set (S3910), The process proceeds to S3514. The display game information input start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The operation when the display control device 114 receives the display game information input start command is the same as when the display game information input start command is received by the process of S2705 of the navigation game setting process (see FIG. 50). . Here, by setting the game information input flag 223f to ON and setting a display game information input start command, it is possible to set an extension of the game end time using the game information input screen. Accordingly, the extension of the game end time can be set without separately preparing a display for extending the game end time. It should be noted that a display for extending the game end time may be separately prepared and input, or instead of inputting the game end time, for example, an extended time such as 30 minutes or 1 hour can be selected. It is also possible to automatically set a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) as an extended time and to change the automatically extended time so that the player can change the setting later. Also good.

  If it is determined in step S3508 that the cursor position is not extended (S3508: No), the navigation game flag 223j and the button effect prohibition flag 223g are set to OFF (S3511), and the data in the game information storage area 223h is set. Is set, a display game result display command is set based on the data in the game information totaling area 223i (S3513), and the process proceeds to S3514. The display game result display command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display game result display command, the display (FIG. 9B) based on the data in the game information totaling area 223i is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display based on the data in the game information totaling area 223i may include a display (for example, a two-dimensional barcode) that can read the displayed information by a reading device. Thereby, a player can easily obtain game information data by a reading device such as a mobile phone.

  When the process of S3510 or S3513 is completed, the extension confirmation flag 223k is set to OFF (S3514), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3507 that the frame button has not been pressed (S3507: No), this processing ends. In this embodiment, there is no processing based on the upper switch 270a or the lower switch 270c, but the display of extending or not extending is arranged vertically so that selection can be made based on the upper switch 270a or the lower switch 270c. Anyway. The game end time may not be determined, and the game result may be displayed by the player performing an operation related to the game end when the game ends.

  Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. When the processing of S2604 or S2605 is finished, it is determined whether or not the continuation confirmation flag 223m is on (S2606). In the process of S2606, if it is determined that the continuation confirmation flag 223m is on (S2606: Yes), a display game continuation confirmation start command is set (S2607), the continuation confirmation flag 223m is set to OFF, and the continuation is continued. The checking flag 223n is set to ON (S2608), and the process proceeds to S2609. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2606 that the continuation confirmation flag 223m is not on (S2606: No), the processes of S2607 and S2608 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2609. Here, the continuation confirmation flag 223m matches the date of the current time with the date of the game information saved in the other register 263b of the RTC 260 in the data reading process (FIG. 40) of the sound lamp control device, and the game of the other register 263b. When information is overwritten in the game information storage area 223h, it is set to ON. Therefore, when the continuation confirmation flag 223m is on, it is possible to confirm whether or not to continue the game based on the saved game information by setting the display game continuation confirmation start command.

  The display game continuation confirmation start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display game continuation confirmation start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays a display (FIG. 10A) for selecting whether or not to continue the game. The game continuation confirmation start command is not displayed by the display game continuation confirmation start command, and the evacuation was performed based on a predetermined operation of the player (for example, pressing the setting button again on the game information input screen). The game may be continued based on the game information. Thereby, it is not necessary to display the game continuation confirmation by the display game continuation confirmation start command, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  When the processing of S2606 or S2608 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the continuation confirmation flag 223n is on (S2609). If it is determined that the continuation confirmation flag 223n is on (S2609: Yes), the navigation game continuation confirmation process is executed (S2610), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuation confirmation flag 223n is not on (S2609: No), the process of S2610 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Here, the details of the navigation game continuation confirmation process (S2610) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the navigation game continuation confirmation process (S2610). This navigation game continuation confirmation process (S2610) is a process for confirming whether or not to continue the game based on the acquired game information in the data reading process (FIG. 40).

  In the navigation game continuation confirmation process, first, data in the cursor position storage area 223p is acquired (S3601). Next, it is determined whether or not the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is pressed (S3602). When it is determined that the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is pressed (S3602: Yes), the same as the case where it is determined that the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is pressed in the extension confirmation process (FIG. 58) (S3502: Yes). It is. The only difference is that the data in the cursor position storage area 223p is not extended or not extended, but is continued or not continued, and the other points are the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S3602, when it is determined that the right switch 270b or the left switch 270d is not pressed (S3602: No), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S3607). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S3607: Yes), it is determined whether or not the data in the cursor position storage area 223p acquired in the process of S3601 is continued (S3608). If it is determined that the cursor position does not continue (S3608: Yes), the navigation game flag 223j and the button effect prohibition flag 223g are set to off (S3609), and the game information storage area 223h and the game information total area 223i data is initialized (S3610), a display game continuation confirmation completion command is set (S3611), and the process proceeds to S3616. The display game continuation confirmation completion command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display game continuation confirmation completion command, the display control device 114 displays a display (FIG. 10 (a)) for selecting whether or not to continue the game displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the cursor position does not continue (S3608: No), the game end time in the data in the game information storage area 223h is greater than the current time in the data in the current time storage area 223q in order to continue the game. It is determined whether it is later (S3612). If it is determined that the game end time is later than the current time (S3612: Yes), the navigation game flag 223j is set to ON (S3613), and a display game information input completion command is set (S3614). , The process proceeds to S3616. The operation by the display game information input completion command set here is the same operation as the display game information input completion command set in the process of S3308 of the frame button process (FIG. 56). Note that a display for confirming game information may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by setting a display game information input completion command based on the data in the game information storage area 223h.

  In the process of S3812, when it is determined that the game end time is not later than the current time (S3612: No), a display game information input error command is set (S3615), and the process proceeds to S3616. When the process of S3611, S3614, or S3615 is completed, the continuation confirmation in progress flag 223n is set to OFF, and this process ends. Here, by setting the continuation confirmation flag 223n to off, the navigation continuation confirmation process (S2610) can be prevented from being executed in the navigation game process (FIG. 49).

  Next, details of the variable display setting process (S1813) executed in the main process (FIG. 41) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1813). This variable display setting process (S1813) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S3706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S3701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S3702), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S3703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S3704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3705). In the process of S3705, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. . More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3706.

  In the process of S3706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S3706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3707), and then in the process of S3706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3708).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3709), and the process proceeds to S3710.

  In the processing of S3709, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3710). This process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, the data storage process (S3817) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this data storage processing (S3817). This data storage process (S3817) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is a process for backing up information related to the navigation game when a power failure occurs.

  In the data storage process, first, data of the current time storage area 223q, the game information storage area 223h, and the game information totaling area 223i is acquired (S3801), and it is determined whether or not the navigation game is being performed (S3802). Whether or not the navigation game is being performed is determined by whether or not the navigation game flag 223j is on. If it is determined in the process of S3802 that the game is a navigation game, the data of the current time storage area 223q, the game information storage area 223h, and the game information totaling area 223i acquired in the process of S3801 are stored in the other registers 263 of the RTC 260. (S3803), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3802 that the navigation game is not being played, the process of S3802 is skipped and the process is terminated. Here, the data saved by the process of S3803 includes date information at the current time, and is used to determine whether or not the dates match in the data reading process (S1610) described above.

<Control Process Executed by Display Control Device 114 in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with command reception and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , Corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3901), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S3901) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S3901) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4001). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4002). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S4001.

  In addition, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the process of S4002, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S4002, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S4003). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S4004), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S3901 in FIG. 62). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S3902 in FIG. 62) (S4005), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process is finished.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S3901), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b are transferred and stored. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 63, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4001 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4001 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S4002 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S4003 to S4005 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S4001 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S4001. And after repeating several times including the process of S4002, you may make it perform the process of S4003-S4005.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S4003 to S4005 without performing the processes of S4001 and S4002. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3902). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, a process of clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It can be easily and immediately determined whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S3903). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power-on main image area 235a is started. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3903, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S3904). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b that is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller stores image data corresponding to the power-on variation image area from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3904, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S3905). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 80A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S6602 in FIG. 80A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 64B), the simple command determination process (FIG. 64) is performed so that the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown) are drawn. (S4208 in (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S4209 in FIG. 64B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (start winning), and the main instruction is to start the variation effect. When the control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. It is possible to perform a simple variation effect. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Immediately after the power-on main image is displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S3905, interrupt permission is set (S3906), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3906, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64B, a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 64B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 64B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4201), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S4201: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S4202) is executed, and then a display setting process (S4203) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S4202), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which V-interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of the change effect, there is a high possibility that the display change pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, it is possible to quickly grasp the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and to produce an effect image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S4203), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4202) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S4204). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S4203) or the simple display setting process (S4209). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S4205). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S4206). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4204), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S4205) are used. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4207). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S4207, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, it corresponds to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (big hit, forward / backward reach, reach other than forward / backward reach, complete miss, chance) The stop type table and the stop type counter to be compared are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4201: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S4208) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S4209) is executed, and the process of S4204 is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (S4202), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 65, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4301). If there is no unprocessed new command (S4301: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4301: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4302), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S4303).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S4304). If there is a display variation pattern command (S4304: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4305), the process returns to S4301.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S4305) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S4601).

  Here, in main controller 110, the determination of the start of variation is always performed several seconds or more away, so that two or more display variation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is not possible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S4601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variation effect having a variation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d to the display data table buffer 233d for the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can feel that the 3rd symbol display device 81 has no discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4601 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4602). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S4601 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S4603). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S4603, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4601, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S4604), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4605). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4606), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S4605, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4601. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S4602. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4604, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4304 that there is no display variation pattern command (S4304: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4306). If there is a display variation type command (S4306: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4307), and the processing returns to S4301.

  Details of the stop type command process (S4307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of the jackpots, reach other than out of front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S4701). After the change effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by comparing the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 64B) is executed. Is finally set (S4702).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4702 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S4703), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. However, before the drawing on the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S4701, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S4702.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 may actually display “special symbol” even if it is “disconnected special symbol”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” is displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 becomes “Special Jackpot”, and may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4306 that there is no display stop type command (S4306: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S4308). If there is a display round number command (S4308: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S4309), and the process returns to S4301.

  Details of the round number command process (S4309) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. The table buffer 233d is set (S4801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4805), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4308 that there is no display round number command (S4308: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a command related to display game information among unprocessed commands (S4310). ), If there is a command related to display game information (S4310: Yes), game information related command processing is executed (S4311), and the processing returns to S4301.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 66, the game information related command processing (S4311) will be described in detail. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing game information related command processing. This game information related command processing is to execute processing corresponding to a command related to display game information received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game information related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display game information input start command among unprocessed commands (S4401), and if there is a display game information input start command (S4401: Yes). ), A game information input start command process is executed (S4402), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Details of the game information input start command process (S4402) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing game information input start command processing. This game information input start command process executes a process corresponding to the display game information input start command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game information input start command process, first, a game information input start display data table corresponding to the display mode of the game information input screen (FIG. 6) indicated by the display game information input start command is determined, and the determined game information The input start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5002).

  Then, based on the game information input start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5005), and the process returns to the game information related command process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4401 that there is no display game information input start command (S4401: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display input screen update command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display input screen update command (S4403: Yes), the display input screen update command process is executed (S4404), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the game information related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display game information input start command among unprocessed commands (S4401), and if there is a display game information input start command (S4401: Yes). ), The input screen update command process is executed (S4402), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Details of the input screen update command process (S4404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing the input screen update command process. This input screen update command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display input screen update command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the input screen update command processing, first, an input screen update display data table corresponding to a display mode for updating the game information input screen indicated by the display input screen update command is determined, and the input screen update display data thus determined is determined. The table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5102).

  Then, based on the input screen update display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5101, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5105), and the process returns to the game information related command process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4403 that there is no display input screen update command (S4403: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display game information input completion command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display game information input completion command (S4405: Yes), display game information input completion command processing is executed (S4406), and the process returns to command determination processing.

  Here, the details of the game information input completion command process (S4406) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71A is a flowchart showing game information input completion command processing. This game information input completion command process executes a process corresponding to the display game information input completion command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game information input completion command processing, first, a game information input completion display data table corresponding to a display mode for completing input on the game information input screen indicated by the display game information input completion command is determined, and the determination The game information input completion display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5202).

  Then, based on the game information input completion display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5201, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5205), and the process returns to the game information related command processing.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4405 that there is no display game information input completion command (S4405: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display game information input error command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display game information input error command (S4407: Yes), the game information input error command process is executed (S4408), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the game information input error command process (S4408) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 (b) is a flowchart showing game information input error command processing. This game information input error command process executes a process corresponding to the display game information input error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game information input error command processing, first, a game information input error display data table corresponding to a display mode for displaying an input error on the game information input screen indicated by the display game information input error command is determined, The determined game information input error display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5302).

  Then, based on the game information input error display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5301, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5305), and the process returns to the game information related command processing.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4407 that there is no display game information input error command (S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display game information input stop command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display game information input stop command (S4409: Yes), the game information input stop command process is executed (S4410), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the game information input stop command process (S4410) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72A is a flowchart showing game information input stop command processing. This game information input stop command process executes a process corresponding to the display game information input stop command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game information input stop command processing, first, a game information input stop display data table corresponding to the display mode for stopping input and stopping display on the game information input screen indicated by the display game information input stop command is determined. Then, the determined game information input stop display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5402).

  Then, based on the game information input stop display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5401, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5405), and the process returns to the game information related command process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4409 that there is no display game information input stop command (S4409: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display game extension confirmation command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display game extension confirmation command (S4411) (S4411: Yes), the game extension confirmation command process is executed (S4412), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Details of the game extension confirmation command process (S4412) will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (b). FIG. 72B is a flowchart showing a game extension confirmation command process. This game extension confirmation command process executes a process corresponding to the display game extension confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game extension confirmation command process, first, a game extension confirmation display data table corresponding to the display mode of the game extension confirmation screen (FIG. 9A) indicated by the display game extension confirmation command is determined, and the determined game extension is determined. The confirmation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5502).

  Then, based on the game extension confirmation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5505), and the process returns to the game information related command processing.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4411 that there is no display game extension confirmation command (S4411: No), it is then determined whether there is a display game continuation confirmation start command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display game continuation confirmation start command (S4413), the game continuation confirmation start command process is executed (S4414), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the game continuation confirmation start command process (S4414) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 (a) is a flowchart showing a game continuation confirmation start command process. This game continuation confirmation start command process executes a process corresponding to the display game continuation confirmation start command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game continuation confirmation start command process, first, a game continuation confirmation start display data table corresponding to the display mode of the game continuation confirmation screen (FIG. 10 (a)) indicated by the display game continuation confirmation start command is determined and determined. The game continuation confirmation start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5602).

  Then, based on the game continuation confirmation start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5605), and the process returns to the game information related command process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4413 that there is no display game continuation confirmation start command (S4413: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display game continuation confirmation completion command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display game continuation confirmation completion command (S4415: Yes), the game continuation confirmation completion command process is executed (S4416), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Details of the game continuation confirmation completion command process (S4416) will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 73B is a flowchart showing a game continuation confirmation completion command process. This game continuation confirmation completion command process executes a process corresponding to the display game continuation confirmation completion command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the game continuation confirmation completion command process, first, a game continuation confirmation completion display data table corresponding to the display mode for ending the game continuation confirmation screen (FIG. 10A) indicated by the display game continuation confirmation completion command is determined. Then, the determined game continuation confirmation completion display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5702).

  Then, based on the game continuation confirmation completion display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5705), and the process returns to the game information related command process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4415 that there is no display game continuation confirmation completion command (S4415: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display game result display command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display game result display command (S4417: Yes), the game result display command process is executed (S4418), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the game result display command process, first, a game result display data table corresponding to the display mode of the game result display screen (FIG. 9B) indicated by the display game result display command is determined, and the determined game result display is performed. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5802).

  Then, based on the game result display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5801, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5805), and the process returns to the game information related command process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When each process (S4402, S4404, S4406, S4408, S4410, S4412, S4414, S4416, S4418) in the game information related command process (S4311) is completed, the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4310 that there is no command related to display game information (S4310: No), then it is determined whether there is a command related to display jackpot among unprocessed commands ( If there is a command related to the display jackpot (S4412: Yes), the jackpot related command process is executed (S4313), and the process returns to S4301.

  Here, the details of the jackpot related command processing (S4313) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related command processing. This jackpot-related command processing executes processing corresponding to the command related to the display jackpot received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the jackpot-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot command among unprocessed commands (S4501). If there is a display jackpot command (S4501: Yes), the jackpot command processing is executed. The process returns to the command determination process (S4502).

  Here, the details of the jackpot command process (S4502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing. This jackpot command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the jackpot command processing, first, a jackpot display data table corresponding to the display mode when the jackpot is generated (FIG. 7) indicated by the display jackpot command is determined, and the determined jackpot display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5902).

  Then, based on the jackpot display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5905), and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4501 that there is no display jackpot command (S4501: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display navigation type command among the unprocessed commands (S4503). If there is a navigation type command for use (S4503: Yes), the navigation type command process is executed (S4504), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Details of the navigation type command process (S4504) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing navigation type command processing. This navigation type command process executes a process corresponding to the display navigation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the navigation type command process, first, a navigation type display data table corresponding to the display mode of the navigation display (FIG. 8) indicated by the display navigation type command is determined, and the determined navigation type display data table is stored in the data table storage area. The data is read from 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6002).

  Then, based on the navigation type display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6005), and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4503 that there is no display navigation type command (S4503: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command among the unprocessed commands (S4505). If there is a display jackpot start command (S4505: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S4506), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the jackpot start command process (S4506) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing jackpot start command processing. The jackpot start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot start command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the jackpot start command processing, first, the jackpot start display data table corresponding to the display mode of the jackpot start indicated by the display jackpot start command is determined, and the determined jackpot start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S6101). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6102).

  Then, based on the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6101, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6105), and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4505 that there is no display jackpot start command (S4505: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot completion command among unprocessed commands (S4507). If there is a display jackpot completion command (S4507: Yes), the jackpot completion command process is executed (S4508), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the jackpot completion command process (S4508) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing jackpot completion command processing. This jackpot completion command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot completion command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the jackpot completion command processing, first, the jackpot completion display data table corresponding to the display format of the jackpot completion indicated by the display jackpot completion command is determined, and the determined jackpot completion display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S6201). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6202).

  Then, based on the jackpot completion display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6201, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6205), and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When each process (S4502, S4504, S4506, S4508) in the jackpot command process (S4311) is completed, the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4312 that there is no command related to the display jackpot (S4312: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S4314), and the error command If there is (S4314: Yes), error command processing is executed (S4315), and the processing returns to S4301.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S4315) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S4902). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4901, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S4902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S4902, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4314 that there is no error command (S4314: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4316), and the processing returns to S4301.

  In the process of S4301 that is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4301: Yes). ), The processing of S4302 to S4316 is executed again. Then, the processing of S4302 to S4316 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S4208) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 64B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying a power-on image (not shown) from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command Only the stop type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 68 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 68 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and the others For this command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 68A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4601. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4602, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79, the details of the above-described display setting process (S4203) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 77, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S6301: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S6302 to S6304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S6305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S6302), and S6303 to S6304. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S6303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S6303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S6303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S6304).

  Details of the warning image setting process will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S6401).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S6401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 77. After the warning image setting process (S6304) or in the process of S6303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S6303: No), the process proceeds to S6305.

  In S6305, pointer update processing is executed (S6305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6501). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S6501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S6502). As a result, if it is End information (S6502: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S6503: Yes), the display data is displayed. Time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S6504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6505), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the display data table for demonstration, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S6503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S6506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6502: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S6306 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S6308: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S6309).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S6309: Yes), the confirmation display effect has not yet been produced and the decision display effect has been performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S6314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S6315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S4204), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S6315. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6309, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S6309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S6316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6316: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the demonstration display data table is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S6317), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6318). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6321), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S6316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S6316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new variation pattern command for display is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 64B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S4209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. (Not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d, which is a display data table that stipulates that display is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S4205), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6601: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S6602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S6601, that is, if it is off (S6601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S6602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S6701), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S6701: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S6702). In the process of S6702, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S6702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6702: Yes), the process proceeds to S6703. Also, as a result of the process of S6701, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6701: No), the process proceeds to S6703.

  In the process of S6703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S6703: No), A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing in S6703 (S6703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6705), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 64B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S4208 in FIG. 64B) and the simple display setting process (see S4209 in FIG. 64B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 65 to 76) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 77 to 79) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 81) (see S6601: No in FIG. 80A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. It is possible to perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S6603), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S4205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6305) of the display setting process (S4203) executed previously is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S6801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S6802), and if it is transfer data information (S6802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S6804), and the process proceeds to step S6805.

  In the process of S6802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S6802: No), the processes of S6803 and S6804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S6805. In the process of S6805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S6805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S6806).

  In the process of S6806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S6806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6806: Yes), the process proceeds to S6807. Also, as a result of the process of S6805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S6805: No), the process proceeds to S6807.

  In the process of S6807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6807). If the transfer start flag is on (S6807: Yes), there is image data to start transfer, so the transfer start flag is present. (S6808), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S6803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S6809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6807: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S6809, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6809). The determination in the process of S6809 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6809 (S6809: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6809 (S6809: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S6810). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S6810, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S6811), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, details of the above-described drawing process (S4206), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4204) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information necessary for drawing each sprite) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S4205), the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated (S6901). That is, in the process of S6901, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4204). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4205), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S6902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S6903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 36B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 to 91, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the special symbol 2 is preferentially started to change. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are simultaneously changed. The configuration of the first embodiment in that at the end of the jackpot game, which one of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 should be targeted is displayed based on the game information and the current time Is different. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 83, the structure of the game board 13 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 83 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the first entrance 64a is arranged at the lower left of the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13 and the second entrance at the right side of the first embodiment. The difference is that 64b is arranged.

  With this configuration, the launch handle 51 is adjusted so that the game ball reaches the upper center position of the variable display device unit 80 to fire the game ball, and the left and right flow paths of the variable display device unit 80 are played. By launching the game ball so that the ball flows down, it is possible to enter the game ball into both the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Therefore, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be changed at the same time to play a game efficiently.

  Further, by adjusting the strength of the firing handle 51 (for example, firing at the maximum strength) so that more game balls pass on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed state). The game ball can be configured to easily enter the second entrance 64b. Therefore, the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) in the special symbol 2 can be increased.

  Further, by adjusting the firing handle 51 so that more game balls pass through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (for example, the strength of firing slightly exceeds the tip of the rail 61), It is possible to make it easier for a game ball to enter the ball opening 64a. Therefore, the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) in the special symbol 1 can be increased.

  As described above, by arranging the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b as in this embodiment, the player can intentionally control which special symbol is used for lottery. it can. In addition, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the ratio (probability) of the jackpot type to be selected is different between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, so that it matches the target and the current target achievement state. And can play games.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area so that the game balls can pass through the left and right sides thereof, so that the flow path of the game area can be partitioned, and the left flow path and the right flow path In addition, it is configured such that the entrance can be controlled by the player by placing the entrances respectively.

  In addition, since an electric accessory is provided at the second entrance 64b, the player can suppress the decrease of the holding ball by playing the game in the right-handed state during the short-time game or the probable game after the big hit. Can play games.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
The electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b, and the contents of the navigation selection table 222a of the sound lamp control device 113 are compared with the first embodiment. And is different in that it has been changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 84 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 113 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203t, and the special figure 1 fluctuation time are compared with the first embodiment. A counter 203u and a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203v are added. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203q is a flag indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is determined to be a jackpot. The special figure 1 big hit flag 203q is set to ON when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 1 that starts the change is a win (FIG. 90, S457). It is set off (not shown) based on the start of jackpot game being set.

  The special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is different from the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q only in that the special figure 1 is changed to the special figure 2, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 is temporarily stopped. In the present embodiment, the variation of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is configured to be simultaneously variable, and when one of the symbols is stopped and displayed with a special symbol that is a big hit, the other special symbol that is changing is temporarily stopped, After the game is over, the remaining changes are executed again. Here, when the variation of the special symbol 2 is stopped, it is set to ON when the determination result is a big hit (FIG. 96, S258). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 92, S255) is set to OFF by the processing of S663. Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop process (FIG. 92, S255) is not executed during the jackpot game (including the period in which the jackpot flag 203m is on), so the temporary stop is canceled when the jackpot ends. Is done.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203t is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is temporarily stopped. Since the special symbol 1 is different from the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s only in that the special symbol 1 is changed to the special symbol 2, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203u is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203v is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2.

  Next, the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 85A to FIG. 85C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first gate selection table b1 of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are set so that the jackpot type selected based on the passage through the first gate is different. More specifically, when the game ball passes through the first gate when the special symbol 1 is a big hit, the big hit type is acquired based on the special figure 1 first gate selection table. Further, when the game ball passes through the first gate at the time of the big hit of the special symbol 2, the big hit type is acquired based on the selection table for the special gate 1 of the first gate.

  FIG. 85 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 first gate selection table 202b1a. In the special figure 1 first gate selection table 202b1a, a big hit D1 (9R probability variable big hit) and a big hit D2 (9R short time big hit) are set. Here, the probability that the jackpot D1 and the jackpot D2 are selected is set to ½.

  FIG. 85 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 first gate selection table 202b1b. In the special figure 2 first gate selection table 202b1b, jackpot E1 (6R probability variation jackpot), jackpot F1 (12R probability variation jackpot), jackpot E2 (6R hour / short jackpot), jackpot F2 (12R hour / big jackpot) are set. The selection probability of jackpot E1, jackpot F1 (probable variation jackpot), jackpot E2, jackpot F2 is set to 1/2. Moreover, the selection probability of jackpot E2 and jackpot F2 is comprised by 1/2. The selection probability of jackpot E2 and jackpot F2 is also set to 1/2.

  As a result, the special symbol 1 is a big hit, and when the first gate 650a is passed, a nine-round big hit game is reliably obtained. On the other hand, in the special symbol 2, either the 6th round or the 12th round is selected with a probability of 1/2 by lottery.

  FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second gate selection table 202b2. In the second gate dedicated selection table 202b2, a special figure 1 second gate selection table 202b2a and a special figure 2 second gate selection table 202b2b are set.

  FIG. 86 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 second gate selection table 202b2a. The special figure 1 second gate selection table 202b2a is a table used for selecting a jackpot type when a special ball 1 is a big hit and a game ball passes through the second gate 650b.

  In the special figure 1 second gate selection table 202b2a, the jackpot G1 (7R probability variation jackpot), the jackpot H1 (11R probability variation jackpot), the jackpot G2 (7R hour / short jackpot), and the jackpot H2 (11R hour / big jackpot) are set. The ratio at which the jackpot G1, the jackpot H1, the jackpot G2, and the jackpot H2 (probability or short time) are selected is ½. The selection ratio between the jackpot G1 and the jackpot H1 is ½, and the selection ratio between the jackpot G2 and the jackpot H2 is ½.

  FIG. 86 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 second gate selection table 202b2b. This special figure 2 second gate selection table 202b2b is a table used for selection of the big hit type when the special symbol 2 is a big hit and the game ball passes through the second gate 650b.

  In the special figure 2 second gate selection table 202b2b, jackpot I1 (2R probability variation jackpot), jackpot J1 (16R probability variation jackpot), jackpot I2 (2R hour / short jackpot) and jackpot J2 (16R hour / short jackpot) are set. The selection ratio of jackpot I1, jackpot J1, jackpot I2, jackpot J2 (probability and short time) is set at 1/2. The selection ratio between the jackpot I1 and the jackpot J1 is 1/2, and the selection ratio between the jackpot I2 and the jackpot J2 is set at 1/2.

  In this way, when the second gate 650b, which is a big hit in the special symbol 1, is passed, the big hit of the 7th round or the 11th round is selected with a probability of 1/2. As described above, if a game ball is passed through the first gate 650a where the special symbol 1 is a big win, a 9-round big hit is always obtained (100% selection rate). The first gate 650a is passed through. However, when the player has a large number of target set difference balls, it is necessary to pass the second gate 650b and aim for a big hit of 11 rounds. In the configuration of the present embodiment, such navigation suitable for the player is configured to be executable.

  In the special symbol 2, at the first gate 650a, 6 rounds or 12 rounds are drawn with a probability of 1/2. In addition, at the second gate 650b, a lottery of 2 rounds or 16 rounds is drawn with a probability of 1/2. Therefore, for the player, the second gate is highly likely to obtain two rounds and is a risky choice.

  Further, in the comparison between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, in the special symbol 1, the first gate 650a is allowed to pass, so that it is possible to reliably obtain a nine-round jackpot. On the other hand, in the special symbol 2, there is a probability that a jackpot smaller than 9 rounds is selected regardless of whether it is the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b, and the risk is set large for the player.

  Therefore, if the number of rounds required to achieve the goal is 9 or less, it is possible to notify the player of a special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player by navigating so that the special symbol 1 is a big hit. . In addition, if the game requires nine rounds or more to achieve the goal and the remaining game time is short, the player will be able to achieve the goal by notifying them to play the game with the special symbol 2 as a big hit. can do.

  In the present embodiment, the frequency of entering the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b can be varied by separating the right strike and the left strike according to the navigation. Therefore, the game can be performed so as to be closer to the player's goal.

  Next, in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the contents of the navigation selection table 222a are changed from the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the navigation selection table 222a in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87, the navigation selection table 222a in the second embodiment defines the navigation type to be selected depending on the number of remaining target rounds and whether or not the game time is at the end. The determination of whether or not the remaining target round number and the game time are in the final stage is the same as the description of the navigation selection table 222a in the first embodiment, and will be omitted.

  If the remaining target round number is less than or equal to 0 (ie, the current difference ball number exceeds the target difference ball), it is up to the player to select whether the game is at the end of the game and whether to make a right or left strike The navigation type D that is displayed (that is, the right-handed or left-handed one is not recommended) is selected. This is because the target difference ball is already exceeded, and the target difference ball is reached (reached) regardless of which gate is selected.

  When the remaining target number of rounds is 1 to 9, the navigation type E that is a display that recommends left-handed aiming at the lottery with the special symbol 1 is selected regardless of whether or not the game is at the end of the game. This is because if the special symbol 1 is a big hit, if the game ball is passed to the first gate 650a, the big hit types that can be selected are D1 and D2 which are the big hits of 9 rounds. This is because, regardless of which jackpot type is selected, the target difference ball can be reached.

  When the remaining target number of rounds is 10 or more, if the game is not the final stage, the navigation type E which is a display recommending left-handed aiming at the lottery with the special symbol 1 is selected. This is because there is enough game time left, so the least number of rounds that can be selected is aiming for the special symbol 1 which is more than the special symbol 2, so that the target difference will be steadily achieved. The purpose is to get closer. On the other hand, if the game is in the final stage, the navigation type F, which is a display that recommends right-handed aiming for a lottery with the special symbol 2, is selected. This is because there is not enough game time left, so the number of rounds that can be selected will be the target during the less game time by aiming for the special symbol 2 with the largest number of rounds than the special symbol 1 The purpose is to reach the difference.

  As described above, the navigation selection table 222a should be appropriately designed according to the game value obtained in the jackpot game, and is not limited to the contents described above. In addition, a table may be prepared and defined for cases where the jackpot is included in the hold. Thereby, the navigation display for reaching the target difference ball can be selected with higher accuracy. Furthermore, the right-handed or left-handed information performed by the player and the information of the first gate 650a or the second gate 650b selected by the player when the big hit occurs are recorded, and based on the recorded information. The contents of the table may be changed.

  In the present embodiment, in the non-time-saving normal game state, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are drawn at the same time, and the game is alternately and efficiently played in the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Since the ball is configured to enter, it is possible to allow the player to play a game efficiently and fairly without giving an advantage or disadvantage to the special symbol type.

  On the other hand, during the probability variation gaming state and the short-time game, the player mainly executes the right-handed game aiming at the right second entrance 64b, so the rate of entering the second entrance 64b is high. . Further, the variation time of the special symbol 2 is extremely shorter than that of the special symbol 2 in the probability variation game and in the short time, so that the variation digestion in the special symbol 2 can be increased in a short time. Therefore, a lottery game can be performed with the special symbol 2 that is more advantageous to the player, and more benefits can be given to the player.

  In addition, during the probability change and in the short time, the lottery game can be performed under advantageous conditions by switching the special symbol 2 so that the special symbol 2 is changed with priority, while allowing the player to play the game more efficiently.

  In this embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot type to which the probability variation game is given is the same for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, but not limited thereto, and the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured to be different. Also good.

  Specifically, during probability change and time reduction, the special symbol 1 is set as the rate at which the jackpot type to which the probability variation gaming state and the normal gaming state are given at a rate of 50% is selected. It is set so that the probability variation game is selected at the rate of%. With this setting, the ratio of the special symbol 2 to be selected is set to 70% in 0.1 seconds by lottery, the ratio selected in 3 seconds is set to 25%, and the ratio selected in 10 seconds. Set to 5%. By configuring in this way, as the variation time of 0.1 seconds is selected, the reserved digest time of the special symbol 2 becomes earlier, the variation of the special symbol 1 is easily started, and the probability variation gaming state is ended. There is a high risk that On the other hand, by selecting a variation time of 10 seconds, it becomes easy to save the special symbol 2 hold, and it is possible to set a high possibility that the probability variation game will be continued.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to generate a jackpot efficiently in a short period of time by changing simultaneously, and during the probability change, either of the special symbols will change whether or not the probability change game can be continued. Can provide a player with innovative gameplay.

  If the percentage of probability change is changed depending on the game state, winning a prize during the jackpot will set the big prize opening to which the probability change will be given and the normal big prize opening. This may be realized by configuring which large winning a prize opening is opened.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 88, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 (S150) performed by MPU201 in the main controller 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process 2 (S150). This special symbol variation process 2 (S150) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the third symbol display performed in the first symbol display device 37. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 2, it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S251). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S251: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not being hit (S251: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 is changing (S252). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 is fluctuating (S252: Yes), the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 is executed (S253), and if it is determined that the special symbol 1 is not fluctuating (S252: No), it is special. The symbol 1 fluctuation stop process is executed (S254). The special symbol 1 variation start process (S253) and the special symbol 1 stop process (S254) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91 and FIG.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 is changing (S255). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 is fluctuating (S255: Yes), a special symbol 2 variation start process is executed (S256), and if it is determined that the special symbol 2 is not fluctuating (S255: No), the special symbol (2) Fluctuation stop processing is executed (S257). The special symbol 2 variation start process 2 (S256) and the special symbol 2 stop process (S257) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95 and FIG.

  When the processing of S251, S256, or S257 is completed, this processing is terminated and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S252) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S253). The special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S253) is executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 88), and the variation of the special symbol 1 is based on the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (N1). It is a process for performing control which starts.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is acquired (S351), and the value of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is greater than zero. It is determined whether or not (S352). If the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is 0 (S352: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is larger than 0 (S352: Yes), processing for starting the variation of the special symbol 1 is executed (S353 to S356).

  Specifically, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is decremented by 1 (S353), and the data in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number storage area 203a is shifted (S354). In the process of S354, data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the hold first area → execution area, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, etc. Shift data. Next, a special symbol 1 big hit determination process is executed (S355), a special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process is executed (S356), and this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 90, the special symbol 1 big hit determination process (S355) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 big hit determination process (S355). The special symbol 1 big hit determination process (S355) is executed in the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (see FIG. 89), and the special symbol 1 is lottery based on the data of the special symbol 1 holding ball execution area 203a. This is a process for setting according to the result.

  In the special symbol 1 big hit determination process, first, data of the special symbol 1 reserved ball execution area 203a is acquired (S451). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S452). If it is determined that the probability is changing (S452: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. However, if it is determined that there is no probability change (S452: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (S454). Here, whether or not the probability change is in progress is determined by whether or not the probability change flag 203g is on. If the probability change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the probability change is in progress and the probability change flag 203g is off. In some cases, it is determined that there is no probability change.

  After the processing of S453 or S454, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q or the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is on (S455). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203q or the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203r is turned on when the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is determined to be a big jackpot. Here, if the special symbol 2 for which a change is being performed simultaneously is a big hit, the special symbol 2 big hit flag 203r is turned on. Therefore, before setting the big win for the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2 Whether or not is a big hit.

  When it is determined in the process of S455 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q or the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is on (S455: Yes), the off symbol of the special symbol 1 is set in the first symbol display device 37 ( S460). Here, when the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203q or the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203r is on, the special symbol 1 is set to be out of the design symbol. Can be prevented.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S455 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q or the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is not on (S455: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big win (S456), When it is determined that the jackpot is big (S456: Yes), the jackpot is set for the special symbol 1 (S457 to S459). When it is determined that the jackpot is not big (S456: No), the first symbol display device 37 is set. The off symbol of the special symbol 1 is set in (S460).

  In the jackpot setting for the special symbol 1 (S457 to S459), the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON for the special symbol 1 (S457), the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is set to the jackpot (S458), Based on the value of the per-type counter C2, the jackpot symbol of the special symbol 1 displayed on the first symbol display device is set (S459). When the process of S459 or S460 is completed, the present process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S356) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S356). The special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S356) is executed in the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (see FIG. 89), and is a process for setting a variation pattern based on the lottery result of the special symbol 1. .

  In the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is a big hit (S551). When it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is a jackpot (S551: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S552), and the jackpot type table is selected based on the jackpot type. (S553). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is not a big hit (S552: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S554).

  When the processing of S553 or S554 is completed, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter (S555), and a special figure 1 variation pattern command is generated based on the selected variation pattern (S556). Based on the variation pattern, a counter value is set in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203o (S557), and this processing is terminated. The special figure 1 variation pattern command generated in the process of S556 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. Among them, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the special pattern 1 variation pattern command, it transmits the display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 (see S3704 in FIG. 60). The display control device 114 displays a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received variation pattern command for display.

  Next, the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop process (S255) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 fluctuation stopping process (S255). This special symbol 1 fluctuation stopping process (S255) is executed in the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (see FIG. 88), and is a process for performing control to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol 1.

  In the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on (S651). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on (S651: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned off (S663), and the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned off. 1 Fluctuation stop command is set (S664), and this process ends. The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON when the special figure 2 is a big hit at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. Thereby, when the jackpot game of special figure 2 is started, the fluctuation | variation of special figure 1 which is changing simultaneously can be temporarily stopped.

  In addition, when the jackpot game is being executed, the special symbol 1 variation stop process (FIG. 92, S255) is not performed, so the special diagram 1 variation stop flag 203s is set to OFF based on the end of the jackpot game. Then, the fluctuation can be resumed for the remaining fluctuation time.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is not on (S651: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203u is subtracted and updated (S652) to determine whether or not the fluctuation time is over. (S653). Whether or not the variable time has ended is determined by whether or not the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203u is 0. If the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203u is 0, the variable time has ended. judge.

  If it is determined in the processing of S653 that it is not the end of the fluctuation time (S653: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time is over (S653: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q is on (S654). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203q is turned on for the special figure 1 (S654: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203t is set to on (S655), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203t is turned on. Is set (S656), and the big hit flag 203m is set to ON (S657).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q is not ON (S654: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S658), and the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than zero. (S658: Yes), the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S659). If the hour / hour counter 203h is 0 (S660: No), the process of S659 is skipped and the process proceeds to S660.

  When the processing of S657, S658, or S659 is completed, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set (S660), the fluctuation of special symbol 1 of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S661), and the time-shortage counter 203h is reset. (S662), this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation start process 2 (S257) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process 2 (S257). This special symbol 2 variation start process 2 (S257) is executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 88), and the variation of the special symbol 2 based on the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2). It is a process for performing control which starts.

  In the special symbol 2 variation start process 2, first, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is acquired (S751), and the acquired value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is 0. It is determined whether it is larger (S752). If the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is 0 (S752: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is larger than 0 (S752: Yes), processing for starting the variation of the special symbol 2 is executed (S753 to S756).

  Specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is decremented by 1 (S753), and the data in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b is shifted (S754). In the process of S754, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the hold first area → execution area, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, etc. Shift data. Next, a special symbol 2 big hit determination process is executed (S755), a special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S756), and this process is terminated.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol 2 big hit determination process (S755) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 big hit determination process (S755). The special symbol 2 big hit determination process (S755) is executed in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process 2 (see FIG. 93), and the special symbol 2 is lottery based on the data of the special symbol 2 holding ball execution area 203b. This is a process for setting according to the result.

  In the special symbol 2 big hit determination process, first, data of the special symbol 2 reserved ball execution area 203b is acquired (S851). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S852). If it is determined that the probability is changing (S852: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. However, if it is determined that the probability change is not in progress (S852: No), a lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (S854). Here, whether or not the probability change is in progress is determined based on whether or not the probability change flag 203g is on. If the probability change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the probability change is in progress. If it is not on, it is determined that there is no certain change.

  After the processing of S853 or S854, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q or the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is on (S855). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203q or the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203r is turned on when the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is determined to be a big jackpot. Here, if the special symbol 1 whose change is being executed is a big hit, the special symbol 1 big hit flag 203q is turned on. Therefore, before the special symbol 2 is set as the big hit, the special symbol 1 Whether or not is a big hit.

  When it is determined in the process of S855 that the special symbol 1 big hit flag 203q or the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is on (S855: Yes), the out symbol of the special symbol 2 is set in the first symbol display device 37 ( S860). Here, when the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203q or the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203r is on, the special symbol 2 is set to be out of the design symbol. Can be prevented.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S855 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203q or the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is not ON (S855: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big win (S856), When it is determined that the jackpot is big (S856: Yes), the jackpot is set for the special symbol 2 (S857 to S859). When it is determined that the jackpot is not big (S856: No), the first symbol display device 37 is set. The off symbol of the special symbol 2 is set in (S860).

  In the jackpot setting for the special symbol 2 (S857 to S859), the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203r is set to ON (S857), the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is set to the jackpot (S858), and the acquired first Based on the value of the winning type counter C2, the jackpot symbol of the special symbol 2 displayed on the first symbol display device is set (S859). When the process of S859 or S860 is completed, the present process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S756) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S756). This special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S756) is executed in the special symbol 2 variation start processing 2 (see FIG. 93), and is a process for setting a variation pattern based on the lottery result of the special symbol 2. .

  In the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is a big hit (S951). When it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is a jackpot (S951: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S952), and the jackpot type table is selected based on the jackpot type. (S953). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is not a big hit (S951: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is set (S954).

  When the process of S953 or S954 is finished, a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S955), and a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is generated based on the selected fluctuation pattern (S956). Based on the variation pattern, a counter value is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203p (S957), and this process is terminated. The special figure 2 variation pattern command generated in the process of S956 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. Among them, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command, the sound lamp control apparatus 113 transmits the display fluctuation pattern command to the display control apparatus 114 (see S3704 in FIG. 60). The display control device 114 displays a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received variation pattern command for display.

  Next, the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop process (S258) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 fluctuation stopping process (S258). This special symbol 2 fluctuation stopping process (S258) is executed in the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (see FIG. 88), and is a process for performing control to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol 2.

  In the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203t is on (S1051). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is on (S1051: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is turned off (S1063), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203n is turned off. A two-variation stop command is set (S1064), and this process ends. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203t is set to ON when the special figure 1 is a big hit at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1. Thereby, when the jackpot game of special figure 1 is started, the fluctuation | variation of special figure 2 which is fluctuating simultaneously can be stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag is not on (S1051: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203p is subtracted and updated (S1052), and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is over. (S1053). Whether or not the variable time is ended is determined by whether or not the value of the special figure 2 variable time counter 203v is 0. If the value of the special figure 2 variable time counter 203v is 0, the variable time is ended. judge.

  If it is determined in the change stop process in S1053 that the change time has not ended (S1053: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable time is over (S1053: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is on (S1054). When it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is on (S1054: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S1055), and a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating on is set. (S1056), the start of jackpot is set (S1057).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203r is not on (S1054: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S1058), and the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than zero. (S1058: Yes), the time reduction counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S1059). If the time reduction counter 203h is 0 (S1058: No), the processing of S1059 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1060.

  When the processing of S1057, S1058 or S1059 is completed, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set (S1060), the fluctuation of special symbol 1 of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S1061), and the time-shortage counter 203h is reset. (S1062), and this process ends.

  Next, processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the jackpot related process (S1912) are changed. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 97, the jackpot related process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, when a jackpot end command is received (S2010: Yes), the 1R difference ball calculation process is executed (S2011), and then the navigation process 2 (S2051) is performed with respect to the first embodiment. It differs in that it is executed. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the navigation process 2 (S2051) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the navigation process 2 (S2051). The navigation process 2 (S2051) is executed in the jackpot related process (see FIG. 97), and displays or suggests that the first ball slot 64a wins a game ball when the jackpot ends. This is a process for causing the 3rd symbol display device 81 to display a display suggesting that a game ball is won in 64b.

  In the navigation process 2, first, data of the target difference ball storage area 223h2 of the game information storage area 223h is acquired (S2151), and the value (P1) of the total number of hit balls counter 223i1 of the game information totaling area 223i is acquired. The value (P2) of the ball number counter 223i2 and data (1R difference ball number) of the 1R difference ball storage area 223i4 are acquired (S2152). And the remaining target difference ball number is calculated by subtracting the current difference ball (P2-P1) from the target difference ball number acquired in the processing of S2151, and the remaining target difference ball number is calculated. The number is calculated by dividing by the number of 1R difference balls acquired in the process of S2152 (S2153). Next, a display navigation type command is set based on the remaining target round number calculated in the process of S2153 and the navigation selection table 222a (S2154), and this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the navigation is performed based on the current number of difference balls and the remaining game time in the case of a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and is output from the main controller 113. Based on the winning information command, it may be configured to discriminate the determination result of the reserved ball and perform the navigation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the holding ball is hit, and in some cases, it is possible to navigate based on a plurality of jackpots, such as navigating to a high-risk gate. .

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines first which jackpot type is selected when it passes a 1st gate and a 2nd gate, and navigates. In this navigation, instead of navigating every time, a navigation that does not determine the jackpot type and a navigation that has been determined may be executed separately by lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the table for selecting the jackpot type for the first gate 650a and the second gate 650b is constant. However, the table is not limited to this, and the table may be varied by lottery. In this case, a plurality of tables are set and one table is set from the plurality of tables by changing the table to be set according to the gaming state (for example, probability change, normal, etc.) or executing a predetermined lottery. You may comprise as follows.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.
<Characteristic A group> (Information on the pounding gate based on game information)
And a lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the entrance of the game ball into the entrance. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result, the bonus game establishment means for establishing the bonus game grant condition, and the first area through which the game ball can pass and the first area are different. A first bonus game that selects a type of the bonus game based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first zone when the bonus game granting condition is established by the second zone and the bonus game establishment means. A second bonus game selection that selects a type of the bonus game based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the second area when the bonus game granting condition is established by the selection means and the bonus game establishment means. Means and the first privilege game selection hand Alternatively, in a gaming machine having a privilege game granting unit that grants a privilege game selected by the second privilege game selection unit, a game ball is placed in one of the first region and the second region Based on the game information, when the bonus game granting condition is established by the input means capable of inputting game information for selecting a notification mode for prompting the player to perform the bonus game and the bonus game establishment means A notification mode selection unit that selects the notification mode; and a notification unit that performs notification based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection unit; and the first privilege game selection unit and the second privilege. The gaming machines A1 are characterized in that the award games selected by the game selecting means are set so that the ratios for selecting the award games that are advantageous to the player are different.

  According to the gaming machine A1, whether or not to give a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the entrance of the game ball that can be entered and the game ball entering the entrance of the game. A lottery means for executing a lottery, a bonus game establishment means for establishing the bonus game grant condition when a lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result, and a first area through which a game ball can pass Based on the second area different from the first area, and when the bonus game granting condition is established by the bonus game establishment means, the type of the bonus game is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first area. When the bonus game granting condition is established by the first bonus game selection means and the bonus game establishment means, the bonus game type is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second area. Second privilege game selection means to select, and previous A bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game selected by the first bonus game selection means or the second bonus game selection means, and a game ball in one of the first area and the second area When the bonus game granting condition is established by an input means capable of inputting game information for selecting a notification mode for prompting the player to enter the game, and the bonus game establishment means, the game information A notification mode selection unit that selects the notification mode based on the notification mode, a notification unit that performs notification based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection unit, and the first privilege game selection unit and the The award games respectively selected by the second award game selection means are set so that the ratios for selecting the award games that are advantageous to the player are different. Thereby, the area | region where a player enters a game ball can be recognized easily. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

  In the gaming machine A1, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the entrance, and the lottery condition for executing the lottery based on the information acquired by the lottery means Based on the storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means and the information stored in the storage means, the lottery result can be determined before the lottery condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A2 comprising: a pre-discriminating unit; and a notification mode selection unit that selects the notification mode based on a discrimination result by the pre-article discrimination unit and the game information.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the acquisition unit acquires information based on the game ball entering the entrance and the acquisition unit until the lottery condition for executing the lottery based on the information acquired by the lottery unit is satisfied. Storage means capable of storing the acquired information, and preliminary determination means capable of determining the lottery result before the lottery condition is satisfied based on the information stored in the storage means The notification mode selection unit selects the notification mode based on the determination result by the pre-article determination unit and the game information. Thereby, more accurate notification can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easier to understand for the player.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a swing that assigns a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter and whether the game ball that has passed through the passage flows down into the first area or the second area. The switching condition of the distribution member and the distribution member is changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down in the first area and a second state in which the game ball can flow down in the second area. Switching means capable of switching based on the establishment, and the notification mode includes information indicating whether the distribution member is in the first state or the second state. A gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, a passing port having an opening through which a game ball can enter, a sorting member that sorts whether the game ball that has passed through the passing port flows down into the first region or the second region, and Based on the fact that the switching member is switched between a first state in which the game ball can flow down in the first area and a second state in which the game ball can flow down in the second area. Switching means capable of switching, and the notification mode includes information indicating whether the distribution member is in the first state or the second state. Thereby, the player can be informed of the state of the sorting member in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the timing at which the game ball reaches the sorting member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the game machine is provided with a clocking means capable of clocking, and the player inputs time information that can be clocked by at least the clocking means by the input means, The notifying means selects the content of the notifying mode based on the timing information counted by the timing means and the inputted timing information, the gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. That is, a timing means capable of timing is provided, and at least timing information that can be measured by the timing means is input by the player by the input means, and the notification means is provided by the timing means. The content of the notification mode is selected based on the timed time information and the input timed information. Thereby, the notification based on the input timing information can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game more tailored to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the notification mode is information based on profits given by the executed bonus game after the game information is input by the input means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A5, characterized by including:

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the notification mode is executed after the game information is input by the input means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the information based on the profits given by the special game is included, there is an effect that the player can recognize the profits given by the special game and can play the game by recognizing the state of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, at least a predetermined even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine, and a power interruption determining means for determining a power interruption state in which the power supplied to the gaming machine is a predetermined voltage or less The game information set in the storage means is stored on the basis of the storage means having a storage area capable of storing the game information for a period of time and the interruption state being determined by the interruption determination means. A gaming machine A6 having storage control means for storing.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, an interruption determination unit that determines an interruption state in which the electric power supplied to the gaming machine is equal to or lower than a predetermined voltage, and the gaming information is stored for at least a predetermined period even when no electric power is supplied to the gaming machine. Storage means having a storable storage area, and storage control means for storing the game information set in the storage means based on the fact that the power interruption state is determined by the power interruption determination means. Is. Thereby, even when a power interruption occurs, game information can be held. Therefore, even when the player returns from the power interruption, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the trouble that the game information must be input again.

  In the gaming machine A6, the storage means is provided in the timing means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, since the storage means is provided in the timing means, there is an effect that the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, based on the fact that electric power is supplied to the gaming machine, a storage discriminating unit that discriminates whether or not the gaming information is stored in the storage unit, and the storage discriminating unit stores the gaming information. A gaming machine A8, characterized by having setting means for setting game information when it is determined that the game information is stored.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that power is supplied to the gaming machine, a storage discriminating unit that discriminates whether or not the gaming information is stored in the storage unit, and the gaming discriminating unit stores the gaming information. And setting means for setting the game information when it is determined.

  Thereby, the player can set arbitrary game information. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic group B> (Notice of pounding gate guidance based on game information in simultaneously changing gaming machines)
A game ball has entered a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance or the second entrance. A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether or not to give a bonus game advantageous to the player, and a lottery result based on the fact that the lottery means has entered the first entrance slot. Display means capable of simultaneously displaying identification information and second identification information indicating a lottery result based on having entered the second entrance, the first identification information and the second identification information Are displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display means displays a specific lottery result on the display means by either the first identification information or the second identification information. When the identification information indicating is displayed, the bonus game grant condition is satisfied The first area when the bonus game granting condition is established by the bonus game establishment means, the first area through which the game ball can pass, the second area different from the first area, and the bonus game establishment means When the bonus game granting condition is established by the first bonus game selecting means for selecting the bonus game type and the bonus game establishment means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second area, Based on the passing of the game ball, the bonus game selected by the second bonus game selection means for selecting the type of the bonus game and the bonus game selected by the first bonus game selection means or the second bonus game selection means is given. Bonus game granting means and input means capable of inputting game information for selecting a notification mode for prompting the player to enter a game ball in one of the first area and the second area And the special Based on the notification mode selection means for selecting the notification mode based on the game information and the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection unit when the bonus game granting condition is established by the game establishment unit. An informing means for informing, wherein the first award game selecting means or the second award game means is the result of the specific lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance. The ratio of selecting a special game that is advantageous to the player is different from the case where the specific lottery result is obtained based on the entrance to the second entrance. A gaming machine B1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first entrance through which a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance or the second entrance Based on the fact that a game ball has entered, a lottery means for executing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a special game advantageous to the player, and that the lottery means has entered the first entrance Display means capable of simultaneously displaying first identification information indicating a lottery result based on and second identification information indicating a lottery result based on having entered the second entrance, and the first identification Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the information and the second identification information on the display means respectively, and the dynamic display means allows either the first identification information or the second identification information to be When identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, A bonus game establishment means for establishing a given condition, a first area through which a game ball can pass, a second area different from the first area, and a bonus game granting condition established by the bonus game establishment means When the bonus game granting condition is established by the first bonus game selection means for selecting the bonus game type and the bonus game establishment means based on the passing of the game ball through the first area, Based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the second area, the second privilege game selection means for selecting the type of the privilege game, and the first privilege game selection means or the second privilege game selection means are selected. Game information for selecting a bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game, and a notification mode for prompting the player to enter a game ball in one of the first area and the second area. Enterable When the bonus game granting condition is established by the input means and the bonus game establishment means, the notification mode selection means for selecting the notification mode based on the game information, and the notification mode selection means are selected. Notification means for performing notification based on the notification mode, wherein the first privilege game selection means or the second privilege game means is configured to select the specific lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance. The ratio of selecting the award game that is advantageous to the player is different between the case where the result is obtained and the case where the specific lottery result is obtained based on the entry to the second entrance. It is what.

  Thereby, the area | region where a player enters a game ball can be recognized easily. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

  In the gaming machine B1, the game machine B1 includes a partition member that divides a game area in which a game ball can flow down into a first game area and a second game area different from the first game area, The gaming machine B2, wherein the second entrance is disposed in the first entrance area in the second entrance.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a partition member that divides a game area in which a game ball can flow into a first game area and a second game area that is different from the first game area, and the first entrance has the first game area. In the region, the second entrance is disposed at each of the second entrances. Thereby, it is possible to play a game by entering any of the first entrance and the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game more suited to the player.

  The gaming machine B2 has a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area, and an adjusting means capable of adjusting the launching force of the game ball launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player. The launching means is configured to be able to launch a game ball by the adjusting means so that the game ball can easily flow down to either the first game area or the second game area. A gaming machine B3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area, and an adjusting means capable of adjusting the launching force of the game ball fired by the launching means based on a player's operation. The means is configured to be able to launch the game ball by the adjusting means so that the game ball can easily flow down to either the first game area or the second game area. Thereby, it is possible to play a game by entering any of the first entrance and the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game more suited to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the game machine has a clocking means capable of clocking, and the player inputs time information that can be clocked by at least the clocking means by the input means, The notifying means selects the content of the notifying mode based on the timing information counted by the timing means and the inputted timing information, the gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, a timing means capable of timing is provided, and at least timing information that can be measured by the timing means is input by the player by the input means, and the notification means is provided by the timing means. The content of the notification mode is selected based on the timed time information and the input timed information. Thereby, the notification based on the input timing information can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game more tailored to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the notification mode is information based on profits provided by the privileged game executed after a predetermined condition is satisfied after the game information is input by the input means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by including

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B4, the notification mode includes the bonus game executed between the time when the game information is input by the input means and the time when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the information based on the profit granted by the game is included, there is an effect that the player can recognize the profit given by the privilege game, and can play the game by recognizing the state of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, at least predetermined even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine and power interruption judgment means for judging a power interruption state where the power supplied to the gaming machine is a predetermined voltage or less The game information set in the storage means is stored on the basis of the storage means having a storage area capable of storing the game information for a period of time and the interruption state being determined by the interruption determination means. A gaming machine B6 having storage control means for storing.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effects are produced. That is, an interruption determination unit that determines an interruption state in which the electric power supplied to the gaming machine is equal to or lower than a predetermined voltage, and the gaming information is stored for at least a predetermined period even when no electric power is supplied to the gaming machine. Storage means having a storable storage area, and storage control means for storing the game information set in the storage means based on the fact that the power interruption state is determined by the power interruption determination means. Is. Thereby, even when a power interruption occurs, game information can be held. Therefore, even when the player returns from the power interruption, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the trouble that the game information must be input again.

  In the gaming machine B6, the storage means is provided in the timing means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B6, since the storage means is provided in the timing means, there is an effect that the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine B6 or B7, based on the fact that electric power is supplied to the gaming machine, a storage discriminating unit that discriminates whether or not the gaming information is stored in the storage unit, and the storage discriminating unit stores the gaming information. A gaming machine B8 having setting means for setting game information when it is determined that it is stored.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6 or B7, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that power is supplied to the gaming machine, a storage discriminating unit that discriminates whether or not the gaming information is stored in the storage unit, and the gaming discriminating unit stores the gaming information. And setting means for setting the game information when it is determined.

  Thereby, the player can set arbitrary game information. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which value (including data written on a magnetic card as well as premium spheres) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. In particular, the basic configuration of the slot machine is that it is equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, a medal or the like.

Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, after a predetermined display mode appears, a big hit based on a predetermined area through which the game ball has passed is allowed to pass through a predetermined area provided on the game board. There is known a gaming machine in which a lottery of types of games is made, and a jackpot game is started with the type of jackpot game selected.
The lottery ratio of the type of jackpot game is different for each of a plurality of predetermined areas, and the player selects any one of the plurality of predetermined areas and allows the game ball to pass through. Thus, the type of jackpot game is selected by lottery (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233181).
However, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to think about which area of the plurality of predetermined areas the game ball is allowed to pass every time a big hit game is generated.
This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine in which a game is easy to understand.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance A lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the mouth or the second entrance, and the first by the lottery means It is possible to simultaneously display the first identification information indicating the lottery result based on entering the entrance and the second identification information indicating the lottery result based on entering the second entrance Display means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, respectively, and the first display information and the second identification information by the dynamic display means. Identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means as either of the identification information The bonus game establishment means for establishing the bonus game granting condition, a first area through which the game ball can pass, a second area different from the first area, and the bonus game establishment means. When a game grant condition is established, the bonus game is selected by a bonus game selection means for selecting a bonus game type based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first area, and the bonus game establishment means. When the grant condition is established, the second privilege game selecting means for selecting the type of the privilege game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second area, and the first privilege game selecting means or the first (2) A bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game selected by the bonus game selection means, and a notification for urging the player to enter a game ball in one of the first area and the second area. Select mode Input means capable of inputting game information for the purpose, and notification mode selection means for selecting the notification mode based on the game information when the bonus game granting condition is established by the bonus game establishment unit; Notification means for performing notification based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection means, wherein the first privilege game selection means or the second privilege game means is provided to the first entrance. In a case where the specific lottery result is based on the entry, and a case where the specific lottery result is obtained based on the entry to the second entrance, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is provided. The ratio to be selected is set to be different.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, and divides a gaming area in which a gaming ball can flow into a first gaming area and a second gaming area different from the first gaming area. It has a partition member, and the first entrance is arranged in the first game area, and the second entrance is arranged in the second entrance.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a first entrance through which a game ball can enter and a second entrance different from the first entrance, the first entrance or the first entrance 2. A lottery means for executing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the entrance, and the first entrance by the lottery means Display means capable of simultaneously displaying first identification information indicating a lottery result based on having entered the ball and second identification information indicating a lottery result based on having entered the second entrance , The dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, respectively, and the dynamic display means to provide the first identification information and the second identification information. On the other hand, when identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, The bonus game establishment means for establishing the bonus game grant condition, the first area through which the game ball can pass and the second area different from the first area, and the bonus game grant means by the bonus game establishment means If established, the bonus game granting condition is established by the first bonus game selection means for selecting the type of the bonus game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first area and the bonus game establishment means. And a second bonus game selection means for selecting a type of the bonus game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second area, and the first bonus game selection means or the second bonus game selection means. In order to select a bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game selected by the above and a notification mode for prompting the player to enter a game ball in one of the first area and the second area. Games An information input means capable of inputting information, a notification mode selection means for selecting the notification mode based on the game information when the bonus game granting condition is established by the bonus game establishment unit, and a notification mode selection A notification means for performing notification based on the notification mode selected by the means, wherein the first privilege game selection means or the second privilege game means is based on the entrance to the first entrance. The ratio of selecting a special game that is advantageous to the player between the case where the specific lottery result is obtained and the case where the specific lottery result is obtained based on the entrance to the second entrance. It is set differently.
Thereby, the area | region where a player enters a game ball can be recognized easily. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a partition member that divides a game area in which a game ball can flow into a first game area and a second game area that is different from the first game area, and the first entrance has the first game area. In the region, the second entrance is disposed at each of the second entrances.
Thereby, it is possible to play a game by entering any of the first entrance and the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game more suited to the player.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines )
64a First entrance (entrance means )
64b Second entrance (entrance means )
81 3rd symbol display device (part of notification means )
S218 provision condition establishment means S405 part of determination means S1304 first determination means S1309 second determination means S2003 notification mode determination means

Claims (2)

A first entrance where a game ball can enter and a second entrance different from the first entrance;
Lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance;
First identification information indicating a lottery result based on entering the first entrance by the lottery means and second identification information indicating a lottery result based on entering the second entrance. Display means capable of displaying each simultaneously,
Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means;
When the dynamic display means displays identification information indicating a specific lottery result on the display means in one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the privilege game granting condition is set. A bonus game establishment means to be established;
A first area through which a game ball can pass and a second area different from the first area;
First bonus game selection means for selecting a type of the bonus game based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first area when the bonus game granting condition is established by the bonus game establishment means;
Second privilege game selection means for selecting a type of the bonus game based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the second area when the bonus game granting condition is established by the bonus game establishment means;
Bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game selected by the first bonus game selection means or the second bonus game selection means;
An input means capable of inputting game information for selecting a notification mode for prompting a player to enter a game ball into one of the first area and the second area;
A notification mode selection unit that selects the notification mode based on the game information when the bonus game granting condition is established by the bonus game establishment unit;
A notification unit that performs notification based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection unit;
The first privilege game selecting means or the second privilege game means is configured such that when the result of the specific lottery is based on the entrance to the first entrance, the entrance to the second entrance The game machine is characterized in that the ratio of selecting a special game that is advantageous to the player is different from that in the case of the specific lottery result based on the game. A partition member that divides a game area in which a game ball can flow into a first game area and a second game area different from the first game area;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first entrance is located in the first game area, and the second entrance is located in the second entrance. .

Images